Chrysler - 200 - Owners Manual - 2014 - 2014

2014 200 2014 OWNER’S MANUAL Chrysler Group LLC 14C41-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A. 200 VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2013 Chrysler Group LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 9 10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS 䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6 䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 1 4 INTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfacLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision tion. workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL INTRODUCTION This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire. Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment. The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects. NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. this Owner’s Manual: INTRODUCTION 5 1 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears stamped on the right front door sill under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title. Vehicle Identification Number INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Stamped VIN Location NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. 1 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 CONTENTS 䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 ▫ Locking the Doors with the Key . . . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .21 䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 ▫ To Unlock The Doors. . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .19 ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . ▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 . . . . . . . . .22 . . . . . . . . .22 . . . . . . . . .25 . . . . . . . . .26 . . . . . . . . .26 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .26 ▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 䡵 REMOTE START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . .28 ▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 ▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 ▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 ▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 ▫ Auto Window Up With Anti-Pinch Protection — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 ▫ Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 ▫ Trunk Internal Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . .41 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .50 䡵 POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 ▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .51 ▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 ▫ Rear Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 ▫ Auto Window Down — If Equipped . . . . . . . .37 ▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .51 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 ▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 ▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 ▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .54 ▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .66 ▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .95 ▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 (BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 ▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 ▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .59 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 ▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The ▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make ▫ Air Bag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 ▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .62 2 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place. You can insert the double-sided keys into the locks with either side up. Vehicle Key Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transaxle Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position, push the key and cylinder inward, rotate the key to the LOCK position, and remove the key. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 NOTE: • If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch lock cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key to the right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the ignition switch lock cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service. Ignition Switch Positions 1 — LOCK 2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) 3 — ON/RUN 4 — START • For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will cancel this feature. • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window 2 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. WARNING! • Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. CAUTION! An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 key forward. For door lock lubrication, see “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” of this Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition manual. sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key. Key-In-Ignition Reminder NOTE: SENTRY KEY® • The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unauignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position. thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation • With either front door open, and the key in the is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked ignition, both the power door locks and Remote Key- or unlocked. less Entry (RKE) transmitter will not function. The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded Locking the Doors with the Key electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized There is only one external door lock cylinder which is vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate located in the driver’s door. the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the door, turn the key rearward. To unlock the door, turn the engine. 2 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle. During normal operation, after turning on the ignition switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds. CAUTION! The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. All of the keys provided with your vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics. Replacement Keys NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 a Sentry Key® has been programmed to a vehicle, it seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron- cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 CAUTION! Always remove the Sentry Key® from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Customer Key Programming You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid Sentry Keys® by performing the following procedure: 1. Cut the additional Sentry Key® Transponder blank(s) At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code. with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). The PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of 2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key ProThen, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position gramming procedure. This procedure consists of proand remove the first key. gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one which has never been programmed. 3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer within 15 seconds. After ten seconds, a chime will System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will authorized dealer. begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key. 2 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4. Insert a blank Sentry Key® into the ignition switch. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing. To indicate that programming is complete, the indicator light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off. NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to your authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed. General Information The new Sentry Key® is programmed. The Remote The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be proand with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is grammed during this procedure. subject to the following conditions: Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you • This device may not cause harmful interference. do not have a programmed Sentry Key® contact your • This device must accept any interference that may be authorized dealer for details. received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors and trunk rearm itself. for unauthorized entry and ignition switch for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is To Arm The System armed, interior switches for door locks and decklid 1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out release are disabled. of the vehicle. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security 2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch Alarm will signal for about 18 minutes. For the first 3 (one door must be open) or the LOCK button on the minutes, the horn will sound intermittently, the headRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (doors can be lights will turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals open or closed), and close all doors. will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster will flash. Then the exterior lights will flash for another 15 NOTE: The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you minutes. lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers. VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the 2 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash for 16 seconds. This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this period, if a door is opened, the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN, or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner, the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm. To Disarm The System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key® into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON/START position. NOTE: • The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle • During the 16-second arming period, if a door is Security Alarm. opened or the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN, the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm. • The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not disarm • Once armed, the Vehicle Security Alarm disables the the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the unlock switch on the driver door trim panel and vehicle through the trunk and opens any door, the passenger door trim panel, the trunk release button on alarm will sound. the instrument panel, and the HomeLink®/Garage The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your Door Opener (if equipped). vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one NOTE: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you press the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. The interior lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the Tamper Alert ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF If the alarm was triggered, but the warning signals have position. timed out, the park and taillights flash three times, and the horn will chirp three times, when unlocking the NOTE: vehicle with a valid RKE transmitter to alert the driver. • The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will remain on if the dimmer control is in the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position). 2 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position). REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. NOTE: Vehicle Key • The line of transmission must not be blocked with To Unlock The Doors metal objects. Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE • Inserting the key into the ignition switch disables all transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash to buttons on the RKE transmitter. acknowledge the unlock signal. The Illuminated Entry system (if equipped) will also turn on. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, proceed as follows: 2. Release both buttons at the same time. 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed. 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle its previous setting. Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understandinside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. system. Opening a door with the system activated will • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to following procedure: deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system. 1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button. 2 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transThe feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when mitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitkey removed. ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows: 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting. • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand- the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. system. Opening a door with the system activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system. following procedure: Illuminated Approach — If Equipped 1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but not longer This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles button while still holding the UNLOCK button. equipped with EVIC. For details, refer to “Electronic 2. Release both buttons at the same time. Flash Lights With Lock THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following steps: (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but not longer than 10 To Lock The Doors seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitholding the LOCK button. ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal. 2. Release both buttons at the same time. Sound Horn With Lock 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed. are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to follows: its previous setting. • For vehicles equipped with EVIC, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 2 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm. To Unlatch The Trunk The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater. NOTE: You may need to be close to the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the Radio Frequency (RF) noises emitted by the system. Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two Programming Additional Transmitters times to unlatch the trunk. Refer to Sentry Key® “Customer Key Programming.” Using The Panic Alarm If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the headlights turn on, the park lights will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the Illuminated Entry system (if equipped) will turn on. contact your authorized dealer for details. Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032. NOTE: Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a 2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it during removal. with rubbing alcohol. 3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two halves together. General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. Separating RKE Transmitter Halves 2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic proved by the party responsible for compliance could transmission to be equipped with Remote Start. void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. How To Use Remote Start If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal All of the following conditions must be met before the distance, check for these two conditions: engine will remote start: 1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life • Shift lever in PARK of a battery is five years. • Doors closed 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some • Hood closed mobile or CB radios. • Trunk closed REMOTE START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED • Hazard switch off • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed) This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve- • Ignition key removed from ignition switch niently from outside the vehicle while still • Battery at an acceptable charge level maintaining security. The system has a range of • RKE PANIC button not pressed approximately 300 ft (91 m). THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 • System not disabled from previous remote start event Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped • Vehicle theft alarm not active The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start premaWARNING! turely: • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon- • Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon • Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar jury or death when inhaled. • Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters • Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls • Remote Start Aborted — System Fault could cause serious injury or death. The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position. 2 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle. NOTE: the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle. Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur: • The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 • Any engine warning lamps come on • Low Fuel Light turns on • The hood is opened • If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and • The hazard switch is pressed then shut down 10 seconds later. • The transmission is moved out of PARK • For security, power window operation is disabled • The brake pedal is pressed when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle. trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system inside door handle. will disable the one-time press of the Remote Start button for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request. To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position. NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle. Manual Lock Knob 2 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • For personal security and safety in the event of an collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. • Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) CAUTION! An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Power Door Locks Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. door panel. Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. Please see your authorized dealer for service. Auto Unlock On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if: 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled. Power Door Lock Switch 2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h). 3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK. 4. The driver door is opened. 2 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 5. The doors were not previously unlocked. 6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h). Auto Unlock On Exit Programming 3. Press the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors. 4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to enabled or disabled as follows: its previous setting. • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings in accordance with local laws. (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand- Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Doors • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have a Childfollowing procedure: Protection Door Lock system. 1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition. 2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON/ RUN and then back to LOCK four times, ending up in the LOCK position. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 2 Child-Protection Door Lock Location The Child-Protection Door Locks are located inside the rear edge of the door. Insert the tip of the ignition key or similar flat-bladed object into the lock and rotate clockwise approximately one-quarter turn to the lock position or counter clockwise to the unlock position (as indicated by the stamped icons). Child Lock Control WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged. 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, pull the lock knob up (UNLOCKED position), roll down the window, and open the door with the outside door handle. POWER WINDOWS Power Window Switches The control on the driver’s door has up/down switches that give you fingertip control of all four power windows. AUTO Power Window Switch There is a single window control on the front and rear passenger’s door trim panel, which operates the front and rear passenger door windows. The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC position, and when the accessory delay feature is active. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 WARNING! Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. Auto Window Down — If Equipped The front window controls on the driver and passenger door trim panels have an Auto-Down feature. These switches are labeled AUTO to indicate this capability. Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. To open the window part way, push the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch either in the up or down direction and release the switch. For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will cancel this feature. For vehicles equipped with EVIC, the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 2 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Auto Window Up With Anti-Pinch Protection — If Equipped NOTE: • If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, anti-pinch protection will reverse the window direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window. To cancel the Auto Up movement, operate the switch either in the up or down direction and release the switch. • Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during autoTo close the window part way, lift the window switch to closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the the first detent and release it when you want the window first detent and hold to close window manually. to stop. Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent, release, and the window will go up automatically. WARNING! When the window is almost closed, there is no anti-pinch protection. To avoid personal injury, be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the window path before closing. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Reset Auto Up Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window probably needs to be reset. To reactivate the Auto Up feature, pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed. 2 Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors. To disable the window controls on the other doors, press the window LOCK button. To enable the window controls, press the window control button again. AUTO Power Window Switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting. TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE Use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to open the trunk from outside the vehicle. From inside the vehicle the trunk lid can be released by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. NOTE: The shift lever must be in PARK for this button to operate. To unlatch the trunk lid from outside the vehicle, press and release the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times. With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the word “dECK ” will display in place of the odometer display indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed or if the trip button is depressed. With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or with the key out, the word “dECK” will display until the trunk is closed. On EVIC-equipped vehicles, the words “Trunk Ajar” will display. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING! 2 Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young children may not be able to escape, even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke. Trunk Internal Emergency Release Trunk Internal Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release Some of the most important safety features in your lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the vehicle are the restraint systems: event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-the- • Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism. positions 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat. • Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located on top of the front seats (integrated into the head restraint) — if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as for the driver and passengers seated next to a window possible. • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized • An energy-absorbing steering column and steering seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether wheel for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems. For more information • Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for • Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may CHildren (LATCH). enhance occupant protection by managing occupant NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage energy during an impact event inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different • All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include rates of inflation based on several factors, including the Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the severity and type of collision. seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow risk of harm from a deploying air bag: children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride facing child seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, buckled up in a rear seat. move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”) WARNING! • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearward facing infant seat. • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. 2. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly. 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt posiside air bags will inflate forcefully into the space tioning booster seats. Older children who do not use between you and the door. child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should 2 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under “If You Need Assistance”. WARNING! (Continued) • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. (Continued) (Continued) WARNING! THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING! (Continued) • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. • Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Lap/Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even conditions. However, in a collision the belt will lock and on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen being thrown out. far away from home or on your own street. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some 2 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body. These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best. • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. (Continued) Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING! • A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. • A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” 2 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle • A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision. WARNING! • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. • A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. 5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt. Positioning The Lap Belt 2 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi- Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the shoulder belt. webbing to allow the belt to retract fully. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). 2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer a higher position. When you release the anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position. In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck. Push anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best. Rear Seat Belts The shoulder belt anchorages of the rear three-point belts are nonadjustable for outboard and center rear passengers on sedans. The center belt is mounted to the rear shelf panel and exits through a bezel in the panel. Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) which are used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Adjustable Anchorage 2 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortfeature for each seating position. ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ Driver Center Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If First Row N/A N/A ALR Equipped Second ALR ALR ALR In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically preRow locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in • N/A — Not Applicable the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combina• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode If the passenger seating position is equipped with an anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating ALR and is being used for normal usage: position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12 Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably years old and under should always be properly rewrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not strained in a vehicle with a rear seat. activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted. 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode WARNING! • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. • Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) Energy Management Feature locking mode. This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest. 2 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Seat Belt Pretensioners Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic. How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require worn snugly and positioned properly. the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- impact requires deployment, both the driver and front straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- passenger seat AHRs will be deployed. sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. 2 NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact. However if during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact. Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components 1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and Trim) 2 — Seatback 3 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover) 4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! 1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat. All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision. NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”. Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR) Hand Positioning Points On AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision, 2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and a comfortable position. front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward (as shown in step three of the resetting procedure). THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism. 2 3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism 1 — Downward Movement 2 — Rearward Movement 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints into the back decorative plastic half. checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert®) BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger (if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened. The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt NOTE: Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. • If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder AHR In Reset Position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual notification. The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe. Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision. BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your autho- Seat Belt Extender rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and deactivating BeltAlert®. when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized 2 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the extender should be used only if the existing belt is not instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex- words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. tender and store it. WARNING! Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not needed. Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air 2 — Knee Bolster Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 NOTE: The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air vehicle is equipped with SABIC, they are located above Bags are certified to new Federal regulations. the side windows. The trim covering the side air bags is labeled SRS AIRBAG. The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seatinflation that are based on several factors, including the Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact. The severity and type of collision. SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the NOTE: inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, seat position. but they will open during air bag deployment. This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately. the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Air Bag System Components Advanced Front Air Bags. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag system components: Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a window. If the • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) 2 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • Air Bag Warning Light • Steering Wheel and Column • Instrument Panel • Knee Impact Bolsters • Driver Advanced Front Air Bag • Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) • Front and Side Impact Sensors • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, and Seat Track Position Sensors output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors. The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. WARNING! • No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel, because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate. Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 WARNING! (Continued) • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. • Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way. • Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label 2 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air bag only. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Location outboard occupant that reduce the potential for sideimpact head injuries. The SABIC air bags deploy down- NOTE: ward, covering both windows on the impact side. • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim; but they will open during air bag deployment. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 • Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that require air bag occupant protection. WARNING! • Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC. The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. • Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. • Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their body outside of the window. SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Occupants, including children who are up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be 2 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially chil- Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls dren, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint. required for this vehicle. Always sit upright as possible with your back against the seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air child. bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, and Knee Impact Bolsters front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the the severity and type of impact. driver and front passengers, and position front occupants Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addifor the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in Bags. certain frontal collisions depending on several factors, Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front including the severity and type of collision. Advanced Air Bags work with the knee impact bolsters to provide Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of improved protection for the driver and front passenger. injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup. 2 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. WARNING! Ignoring the air bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates are possible, based on several factors, including the collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Inflator Units Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are During collisions where the impact is confined to a designed to activate only in certain side collisions. particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle. collision. A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you inflates in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves are not belted and seated properly, or if items are at a very high speed and with such a high force that it positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items inflates. This especially applies to children. The side are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when This especially applies to children. it is inflated. 2 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off. vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is Front And Side Impact Sensors removed. In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact • Unlock the doors automatically. events. In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF. the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions: • Cut off fuel to the engine. If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment. NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur: throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning. • The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deabrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium bags will not be in place to protect you. floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. WARNING! However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, immediately. seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Conprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used for air troller System serviced as well. bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or 2 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. (Continued) • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Air Bag Warning Light NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good. You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of Event Data Recorder (EDR) the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder the air bag system immediately. (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems perfirst turned to the ON/RUN position. formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of eight-second interval. time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving. • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; 2 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, were buckled/fastened; such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the vehicle or the EDR. accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, Child Restraints • How fast the vehicle was traveling. Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all These data can help provide a better understanding of times, including babies and children. Every state in the the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. United States, and every Canadian province, requires NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- Children 12 years or younger should ride properly sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of the rear seats rather than in the front. personally identifying data routinely acquired during a There are different sizes and types of restraints for crash investigation. children from newborn size to the child almost large To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. NOTE: • For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: • http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm WARNING! In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. 2 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Infants and Toddlers Small Children Larger Children Children Too Large for Child Restraints Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Recommended Type of Child Restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. WARNING! • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearward facing infant seat. • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who 2 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt. WARNING! • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the vehicle’s seat belt alone: child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit perithe vehicle seat? odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm way back? or behind their back. 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm? 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach? 2 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below LATCH – Seat Belt Only LATCH – Seat Belt + Top Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Only + Top Tether Anchor X X X X X X THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Restraint System Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information. 2 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle • • Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position Top Tether Anchorage Symbol THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint? 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint? Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages? No Yes Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH anchorage system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position. You can install child restraints with flexible lower anchors in the center position. The inner anchorages are 15.4 inches (392 mm) apart. Do not install child restraints with rigid lower anchors in the center position. 2 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage? No Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Yes Can the head restraints be removed? No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along gap between the seatback and seat cushion. 2 Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages Locating The LATCH Anchorages In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE window. These tether strap anchorages are under a anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it. rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. Center Seat LATCH Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments in the center seating position. Only install this type of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be installed in any rear seating position. WARNING! Tether Strap Anchorages LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCHcompatible child restraints next to each other, you (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 WARNING! (Continued) must use the seat belt for the center position. You can then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard positions. Please refer to “Installing The LATCHCompatible Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions. 2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. 3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seatrestraint systems will be installed as described here. ing position. To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint 5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child 1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable AutoRestraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direcmatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat tions to attach a tether anchor. belt, following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating position has. 2 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them. WARNING! Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can Restraints in this Vehicle be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below and the following sections for more information about both types of seat belts. 2 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint? Weight limit of the Child Restraint Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Yes Can the head restraints be removed? Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint? No Yes Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. In positions with cinching latch plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract Place the child seat in the center of the seating back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you position. For some second row seats, you may need to will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a now in the Automatic Locking mode. better fit. 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor locked, you should not be able to pull out any webto pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a lap portion around the child restraint while you push “click.” the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) 1. 2. 3. 4. 2 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chilposition. For some second row seats, you may need to dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get attach a tether anchor. a better fit. 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt in any direction. path. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. “click.” 4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt restraint. path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint installation tight, try a different seating position. 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. 2 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage 2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint. 1. Look behind the seating position where you 3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path plan to install the child restraint to find the for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If tether anchorage. You may need to move the your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head seat forward to provide better access to the restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, tether anchorage. If there is no top tether route the tether strap under the head restraint and anchorage for that seating position (see the between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head charts above), move the child restraint to restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard another position in the vehicle if one is side of the head restraint. available. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS Tether Strap Mounting 1 — Cover 3 — Attaching Strap A — Tether Strap Hook B — Tether Anchor A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). 4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. 2 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. SAFETY TIPS CAUTION! Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. follow these safety tips: • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. Exhaust Gas WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), (Continued) The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. 2 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the belt. Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Defroster Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced the blower control on high speed. You should be able to immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. feel the air directed against the windshield. See your Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inopercollision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after able. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 Floor Mat Safety Information WARNING! (Continued) Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. • Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners. • Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning. (Continued) (Continued) WARNING! 2 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. • If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle. Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Door Latches Check for positive closing, latching, and locking. Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline Tires fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects should be located and corrected immediately. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 ▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .106 ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .127 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 ▫ Adjusting Side View Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 ▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .108 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .108 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .109 䡵 Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .109 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .140 ▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .140 ▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 ▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 3 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 ▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 ▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .163 ▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .151 ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .163 ▫ Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 ▫ Headlights With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 ▫ Reclining Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 ▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 ▫ Lumbar Support — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .153 ▫ Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 ▫ Fold-Flat Passenger Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 ▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 ▫ High/Low Beam Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 ▫ Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest . . . . . . . . .160 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .160 ▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 ▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 ▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 ▫ Map/Reading/Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .168 ▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .169 ▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 ▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 ▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 ▫ Headlights With Wipers Feature (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .173 䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED. . . .177 ▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .179 ▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 ▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .182 ▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .183 ▫ Using HomeLink®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 3 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .189 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .186 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 ▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .187 ▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .188 ▫ Glovebox Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 䡵 CONSOLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 ▫ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 ▫ Ski Pass-Through. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 . .193 . .193 . .193 . .195 . .195 . .195 . .195 . .197 . .199 . .199 . .199 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 MIRRORS Inside Day/Night Mirror A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window. 3 Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield). Adjusting Rearview Mirror 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate. NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse. Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Power Mirrors The power mirror control is located on the driver’s door trim panel. 3 Mirror Directions Power Mirror Control To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move. When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror. 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Adjusting Side View Mirrors WARNING! (Continued) Outside Mirror — Driver Side Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror. Outside Mirror — Passenger Side collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side mirror. Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either vehicle. forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and WARNING! normal. Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to (Continued) Heated Mirrors — If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Some vehicles may UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 not be equipped with rear window defroster, in this case the heated mirrors will still function as intended. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped 3 An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use the mirror, lower the sun visor and rotate the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights. Illuminated Vanity Mirror Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your mobile phone’s audio is 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the sys- The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your tem will automatically mute your radio when using the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® Phone. Uconnect® features Bluetooth® technology - the global NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone standard that enables different electronic devices to conequipped with the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile”, nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for Uconnect® Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as supported phones. long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to For Uconnect® customer support: the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® Phone • U.S. residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be 1–877–855–8400. used with the system at a time. The system is available in • Canadian Residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com English, Spanish, or French languages. or call, 1-800-465–2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French). WARNING! Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation. Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 WARNING! (Continued) laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death. Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the “Operation” section. The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the Uconnect® Phone Button Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your The radio or steering wheel controls (if mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for equipped) will contain the two control buttons details. button and Voice Com(Uconnect® Phone The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehibutton) that will enable you to mand cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone access the system. When you press the button you will can be adjusted either from the radio volume control hear the word Uconnect® followed by a BEEP. The beep knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right is your signal to give a command. switch), if so equipped. The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect® Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on certain radios. 3 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect® Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone menu structure. Voice commands are required after most Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options. part of the command when you are asked for it. For example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry,” or you can break the compound form command into two voice commands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry.” Please remember, the Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you. • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the Voice Command Tree beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section. prompt. • For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then “Pair a Device”, the following compound command can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth® Device.” Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following the beep. The Uconnect® Phone will play some of the • For each feature explanation in this section, only the options at any prompt if you ask for help. compound form of the voice command is given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 To activate the Uconnect® Phone, simply press the The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone button and follow the audible prompts for directions. pairing instructions: Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a press of the • Press the button to begin. button on the radio control head. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Cancel Command “Device Pairing.” At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a • When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device” and follow the audible prompts. few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu. • You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone. after the initial pairing process. To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer- • For identification purposes, you will be prompted to ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The give the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instrucphone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be tions for pairing. given a unique phone name. 3 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven, with one being the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any given time, only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to your Uconnect® System. The priority allows the Uconnect® Phone to know which mobile phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the Uconnect® Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call. You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to “Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section). Dial By Saying A Number • The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call. • For example, you can say “151-1234 -5555.” • The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the display of certain radios. Call By Saying A Name • Press the button to begin. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Call.” • The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say the name of the person you want to call. For example, • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say you can say “John Doe,” where John Doe is a previ“Dial.” ously stored name entry in the Uconnect® phonebook • Press the button to begin. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a • Automatic download and update, if supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your made to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you Uconnect® Phonebook.” start the vehicle. • The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number, which may • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected appear in the display of certain radios. to the Uconnect® Phone. Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook • Depending on the maximum number of entries downTransfer From Mobile Phone loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availUconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availnames) and number entries from your mobile phone’s able for use. phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature. See • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile Uconnect® website for supported phones. phone is accessible. • To call a name from the Uconnect® Phonebook or • Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded. by Saying a Name” section. 3 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or • When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., “Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be allow you to store multiple numbers for each phoneedited on the mobile phone. The changes are transbook entry, if desired. ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next phone connection. • When prompted, recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding. Add Names To Your Uconnect® Phonebook NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more recommended when the vehicle is not in motion. phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the button to begin. • Press the main menu. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 “Phonebook New Entry.” names in the phonebook with each name having up to • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of four associated phone numbers and designations. Each long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom- language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert” only in that language. In addition, if equipped and supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automatiinstead of “Bob.” cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return when the vehicle is not in motion. Automatic downto the main menu. loaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited. “Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another phone button to begin. • Press the number to a name entry that already exists in the • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a “Phonebook Edit.” mobile and a home number, but you can add “John Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit” • You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook feature. entry that you wish to edit. Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry • Next, choose the number designation (home, work, NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended mobile, or other) that you wish to edit. when the vehicle is not in motion. • When prompted, recite the new phone number for the button to begin. • Press the phonebook entry that you are editing. Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Phonebook Delete.” 3 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose. To select one of the entries button while the from the list, press the Uconnect® Phone is playing the desired entry and say “Delete.” Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® Phonebook Entries • Press the button to begin. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Phonebook Erase All.” • The Uconnect® Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook. • After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted. • After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, • Note that only the phonebook in the current language work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you is deleted. wish to delete. • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be • Note that only the phonebook entry in the current deleted or edited. language is deleted. List All Names In The Uconnect® Phonebook • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be • Press the button to begin. deleted or edited. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be “Phonebook List Names.” accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your • The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the mobile service provider for the features that you have. phonebook entries, including the downloaded phoneAnswer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call book entries, if available. Currently In Progress but• To call one of the names in the list, press the ton during the playing of the desired name, and say When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys“Call.” tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” button to accept the call. To reject the call. Press the operations at this point. button until you hear a single call, press and hold the • The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected. number designation you wish to call. Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call • The selected number will be dialed. Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for The following features can be accessed through the call waiting that you normally hear when using your Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your Phone Call Features 3 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE button to place the current Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold mobile phone. Press the call on hold and answer the incoming call. To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To butmarket today do not support rejecting an incoming call bring the call back from hold, press and hold the when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can ton until you hear a single beep. only answer an incoming call or ignore it. Toggling Between Calls Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the button until you hear a single beep, indicatTo make a second call while you are currently on a call, ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time. by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to Conference Call call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling When two calls are in progress (one active and one on button until you hear a Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer hold), press and hold the double beep indicating that the two calls have been to “Conference Call” in this section. joined into one conference call. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Three-Way Calling Redial To initiate three-way calling, press the button while • Press the button to begin. a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say described under “Making a Second Call While Current “Redial.” Call is in Progress.” After the second call has established, button until you hear a double • The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that press and hold the beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into was dialed from your mobile phone. one conference call. NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the Call Termination Uconnect® Phone. To end a call in progress, momentarily press the button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press button until you hear a single beep. and hold the Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition has been switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types: • After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call 3 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say the name of the language you wish to switch to cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and English, Espanol, or Francais. transfer of the call to the mobile phone. • After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue • Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection. on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred from the After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone. voice commands will be in that language. • An active call is automatically transferred to the moNOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change bile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF. operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not languageUconnect® Phone Features specific and is usable across all languages. Language Selection Emergency Assistance To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is using: reachable: button to begin. • Press the • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is • If supported, this number may be programmable on some systems. To do this, press the button and say operational, you may reach the emergency number as “Setup,” followed by “Emergency.” follows: • The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say for the mobile phone directly. “Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number. WARNING! This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico. To use you Uconnect® Phone System in an emergency, your mobile phone must be: NOTE: • turned on, • The emergency number dialed is based on the country • paired to the Uconnect® System, where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and • and have network coverage. Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and Roadside Assistance / Towing Assistance area. If you need roadside assistance: • Press the button to begin. • Press the button to begin. 3 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Working With Automated Systems “Towing Assistance.” This method is used in instances where one generally has NOTE: You should program the desired Towing Assis- to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while tance phone number using the Voice Command system. navigating through an automated telephone system. To do this, press the button and say “Setup,” followed by You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail “Towing Assistance.” When prompted say 1-800-528- system or an automated service, such as a paging service 2069 for the U.S., say 1-800-363-4869 for Canada, say or automated customer service line. Some services re55-14- 3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for out- quire immediate response selection. In some instances, side Mexico City in Mexico. that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone. Paging When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed by the word “Send.” For example, if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can press the Voice Mail Calling button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send.” Saying a number, To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send,” is also to be with Automated Systems.” To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated Systems.” Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies, which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect® Phone. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 used for navigating through an automated customer • Some paging and voice mail systems have system time service center menu structure, and to leave a number on out settings that are too short and may not allow the a pager. use of this feature. You can also send stored Uconnect® phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to call and then press the button and say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send. The Uconnect® Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone. NOTE: Barge In — Overriding Prompts The “Voice Command” button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately. For example, if a prompt is asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you button and say, “Pair a Phone” to could press the select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt. Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone network configurations. This is normal. will not repeat a phone number before you dial it). • Press the button to begin. 3 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s one of the following: audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same – “Setup Confirmation Prompts On” as if you dial the number using Voice Command. – “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off” NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the Phone And Network Status Indicators dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle If available on the radio and/or on a premium display audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situasuch as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide that the call did not go through even though the call is in notification to inform you of your phone and network progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the status when you are attempting to make a phone call audio. using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for network Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF) signal strength, phone battery strength, etc. When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad able to hear the conversation coming from the other You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing order to mute the Uconnect® Phone: via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise • Press the button. caution and take precautionary safety measures). By UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 • Following the beep, say “Mute.” In order to un-mute the Uconnect® Phone: • Press the button. • Following the beep, say “Mute off.” Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected” with one electronic device at a time. If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth® connection between your mobile phone and the Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone Uconnect® Phone System, follow the instructions deThe Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual. ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone List Paired Mobile Phone Names without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call button to begin. from your Uconnect® Phone paired mobile phone to the • Press the button Uconnect® Phone or vice versa, press the • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say and say “Transfer Call.” “Setup Phone Pairing.” Advanced Phone Connectivity • When prompted, say “List Phones.” • The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the 3 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone • The selected phone will be used for the next phone call. If the selected phone is not available, the button and say “Sebeing announced, press the Uconnect® Phone will return to using the highest lect” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sections for an priority phone present in or near (approximately alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone. within 30 ft. (9 m)) the vehicle. Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired Mobile Phones phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone. • Press the • Press the button to begin. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Setup Phone Pairing.” • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts. • At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the prompts. button at any time while the • You can also press the list is being played, and then choose the phone that • You can also press the button at any time while the you wish to select. list is being played, and then choose the phone you wish to delete. button to begin. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect® Phone Uconnect® Phone Tutorial • Press the button and say the “Voice Training,” “System Training,” or “Start Voice Training” command. You can either press the Uconnect® Phone button to To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the restore the factory setting or repeat the words and button and say “Uconnect® Tutorial.” phrases when prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For best results, the Voice Training session should be comVoice Training pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect® running, all windows closed, and the blower fan Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this switched off. training mode, follow one of the two following procedures: This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from system will adapt to the last trained voice only. radio mode): • Press and hold the the session begins, or, Reset button for five seconds until • Press the button. • After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say “Setup,” then “Reset.” 3 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries, and other settings in all language modes. The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings. Voice Command • low road noise, • smooth road surface, • fully closed windows, • dry weather condition. • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to • Even though the system is designed for users speaking provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead in North American English, French, and Spanish acconsole (if equipped) and the mirror. cents, the system may not always work for some. • Always wait for the beep before speaking. • When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of • Speak normally without pausing, just as you would speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.” speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you. • Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended. • Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period. • It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect® Phonebook. • Performance is maximized under: • low-to-medium blower setting, • low-to-medium vehicle speed, UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 • Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar. • Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.” • smooth road surface, • fully closed windows, • dry weather conditions, and • operation from the driver’s seat. • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the Uconnect® Phone. • Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing • Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced number combinations may not be supported. by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. • You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero). • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down. compromised with the convertible top down. Far End Audio Performance Recent Calls • Audio quality is maximized under: • low-to-medium blower setting, • low-to-medium vehicle speed, • low road noise, If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Download,” Uconnect® Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming and Missed Calls. 3 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Text Reply Send Messages: Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send your phone. a new message: Read Messages: • Press the button. If you receive a new text message while your phone is • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will “SMS Send” or “Send Message.” be made to notify you that you have a new text message. • You can either say the message you wish to send or say If you wish to hear the new message: “List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages. button. • Press the button while the To send a message, press the • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say system is listing the message and say “Send.” “SMS Read” or “Read Messages.” Uconnect® Phone will prompt you to say the name or • Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for number of the person you wish to send the message to. you. List of Preset Messages: After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward” 1. Yes the message using Uconnect® Phone. 2. No UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 3. Where are you? 16. Can this wait? 4. I need more direction. 17. Bye for now 5. L O L 18. When can we meet? 6. Why 19. Send number to call 7. I love you 20. Start without me 8. Call me Turn Voice Text Reply Incoming Announcement ON/ OFF 9. Call me later 11. See You in 15 minutes Turning the Voice Text Reply Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming messages. 12. I am on my way • Press the 13. I’ll be late • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Setup, Incoming Message Announcement”, you will then be given a choice to change it. 10. Thanks 14. Are you there yet? 15. Where are we meeting? button. 3 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Bluetooth® Communication Link Power-Up Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode. After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 3 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 3 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Commands Primary Alternate (s) zero one two three four five six seven eight nine star (*) plus (+) pound (#) add location Voice Commands Primary Alternate (s) all call cancel confirmation prompts continue delete dial download edit emergency English erase all Espanol Francais UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Voice Commands Primary Alternate (s) help home language list names list phones mobile mute mute off new entry no other pair a phone phone pairing pairing phonebook phone book Voice Commands Primary Alternate (s) previous record again redial return to main menu return or main menu select phone select send set up phone settings or phone set up towing assistance transfer call Uconnect® Tutorial voice training work yes 3 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Command System Operation RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player, • Changes or modifications not expressly approved by USB mass storage class device, iPod® family of the party responsible for compliance could void the devices, Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device, user’s authority to operate the equipment. satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder. • This device may not cause harmful interference. NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System • This device must accept any interference received, as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the including interference that may cause undesired opVoice Interface System to recognize user voice commands eration. may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 WARNING! Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death. Pressing the Voice Command button while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or change commands. This will become helpful once you start to learn the options. NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel,” “Help” or “Main Menu.” button, you These commands are universal and can be used from any When you press the Voice Command will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a menu. All other commands can be used depending upon command. the active application. NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few When using this system, you should speak clearly and at seconds, the system will present you with a list of a normal speaking volume. options. The system will best recognize your speech if the winIf you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is button, listen for set to low. options, press the Voice Command the beep, and say your command. 3 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Comcommands, you will be prompted to repeat it. mand system is speaking. Please note the volume To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Comsetting for Voice Command is different than the audio button and say “Help” or “Main Menu.” mand system. Commands Main Menu The Voice Command system understands two types of commands. Universal commands are available at all Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the times. Local commands are available if the supported main menu. radio mode is active. In this mode, you can say the following commands: Changing the Volume 1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command • “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode) button. • “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode) 2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”). • “Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode) • “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode) • “USB” (to switch to USB mode) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 • “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth® Radio FM Streaming mode) To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM.” In this mode, you may say the following commands: • “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder) • “System Setup” (to switch to system setup) • “Frequency #” (to change the frequency) Radio AM • “Next Station” (to select the next station) To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM.” In • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station) this mode, you may say the following commands: • “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu) • “Frequency #” (to change the frequency) • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) • “Next Station” (to select the next station) Satellite Radio • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station) To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite • “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu) • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) Radio.” In this mode, you may say the following commands: • “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its spoken number) 3 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • “Next Channel” (to select the next channel) USB Mode • “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel) To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this mode, you may say the following commands: • “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels) • “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel) • “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu) • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) • “Next Track” (to play the next track) • “Previous Track” (to play the previous track) • “Play” (to play a Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album Name, Track Name, etc.) Disc Mode Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this mode, you To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, say may say the following commands: “Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you may say the following commands: • “Track” (#) (to change the track) • “Next Track” (to play the next track) • “Next Track” (to play the next track) • “Previous Track” (to play the previous track) • “Previous Track” (to play the previous track) • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) • “List” (to list an Artist, Playlist, Album, Track, etc.) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Memo Mode – “Delete” (to delete a memo) To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” In • “Delete All” (to delete all memos) this mode, you may say the following commands: Setup • “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the To switch to system setup, you may say one of the recording, you may press the Voice Command following: button to stop recording. You proceed by saying • “Change to setup” one of the following commands: – “Save” (to save the memo) – “Continue” (to continue recording) – “Delete” (to delete the recording) • “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — During the playback you may press the Voice Combutton to stop playing memos. You promand ceed by saying one of the following commands: – “Repeat” (to repeat a memo) – “Next” (to play the next memo) – “Previous” (to play the previous memo) • “Switch to system setup” • “Main menu setup” or • “Switch to setup” In this mode, you may say the following commands: • “Language English” • “Language French” • “Language Spanish” • “Tutorial” 3 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • “Voice Training” 2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training” NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice session should be completed when the vehicle is button first and wait for the beep Command parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the before speaking the “Barge In” commands. blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the Voice Training last trained voice only. For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect® SEATS Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used. Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the button, say “System vehicle. 1. Press the Voice Command Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice Training.” This will train your own voice to the system WARNING! and will improve recognition. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 WARNING! (Continued) • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. 3 Power Seats — If Equipped The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use the bottom switch to move the seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat. The top switch controls the seatback recliner. Power Seat Switches 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path. Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. 3 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path. Heated Seats — If Equipped You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF. Press the switch once to select HIGH-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF. There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently. The controls NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt for each heater are located on the center of the instrument within two to five minutes. panel (above the climate controls). When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turn OFF Manual Front Seat Adjustment automatically after approximately 30 minutes. The manual seat adjustment bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor. WARNING! • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. 3 Manual Seat Adjusting Bar 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear- mechanism, located on the outboard side of the seat, ward. Release the bar once the seat is in the position raises and lowers it. Total travel is 2.2 in (56 mm). desired. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. WARNING! Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked. Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster — If Equipped Seat Height Adjustment Lever Reclining Seats A lever style height adjustment feature enhances comfort for petite as well as tall drivers. A lever with a ratcheting The recline lever is located on the side of the seat. To recline, lean forward slightly before lifting the lever, then lean back to the desired position and release the lever. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position. WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked. • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked. Lumbar Support — If Equipped Recline Lever This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support. The control lever is located on the outboard side of the driver’s seatback. Turn the control lever downward to increase and upward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support. 3 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. Active Head Restraints — Front Seats Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily Head Restraints identified by any markings, only through visual inspecHead restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split by restricting head movement in the event of a rear in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top trim, the back half being decorative plastic. of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. Lumbar Support Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. 3 Push Button For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head. 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Active Head Restraint (Normal Position) Active Head Restraint (Tilted) NOTE: • The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 • In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. WARNING! • Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed. Head Restraints — Rear Seats The rear seat head restraints are fixed and cannot be adjusted. For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. 3 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The hard seatback features a work surface and a molded The recline handle on the front passenger seat also rim for retaining items stored on the seatback panel. releases the seatback to fold forward. Fold-Flat Passenger Seatback Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat Recline Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 When returning the rear seatback to the upright position, To provide additional storage area, the rear seatback can be sure the seatback is latched. be folded forward. Pull on the loops to fold down either WARNING! or both seatbacks. Folding Rear Seat • Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. • The rear cargo area of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system. Rear Seat Release Loops 3 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD The rear seat is equipped with a folding armrest with To open the hood, two latches must be released. cupholders. 1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel. Folding Rear Seat Armrest Hood Release Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 2. Then lift the secondary latch located under the front edge of the hood, near the center and raise the hood. 3 Prop Rod Location Hood Safety Latch Location Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole on the left underside of the hood. NOTE: Before closing the hood, make sure to stow the prop rod in its proper location. 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage. passing light, fog lights, instrument panel light dimming and turn signals. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column. WARNING! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the parking lights, headlights, headlight beam selection, Multifunction Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Headlights And Parking Lights Automatic Headlights — If Equipped Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent Turning the end of the multifunction lever to the third for parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for detent (AUTO), will activate the automatic headlight headlight operation. system. 3 Headlight Switch Headlight Switch 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE With the engine running and the multifunction lever in Headlight Time Delay the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on and turn There is also a feature that delays turning off the vehicle off based on the surrounding light levels. lights for 30, 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is Headlights With Wipers (Available With Automatic turned OFF. To activate the headlight delay, the multifunction lever must be rotated to the off position after the Headlights Only) ignition switch is turned OFF. Only the headlights will When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on illuminate during this time. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position. Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers further information. are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. Lights On Reminder The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition (EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor- is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver mation Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Fea- when the driver’s door is opened. tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. defective. Turn Signals Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off. High/Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you, to switch the headlights back to low beam. Turn Signal Control 3 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Flash-To-Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released. NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-topass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds for the next flash-to-pass operation. Fog Lights — If Equipped Front Fog Light Operation The front fog light switch is on the multifunction NOTE: The front fog lights will only operate with the lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out will turn off the front fog lights. the end of the multifunction lever. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when The front turn signal lamps will turn on as Daytime the parking lights or headlights are on. Running Lights (DRL) whenever the ignition is ON, the engine is running, the headlight switch is off, the parking Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last brake is released and the shift lever is in any position detent to turn on the interior lighting. except PARK. Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights will flash when a turn signal is in operation and return to DRL mode when the turn signal is not operating. Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened. Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on. Dimmer Control 3 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Map/Reading/Interior Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rearview mirror. Each light can be turned on by pressing the barrel. Press the barrel a second time to turn the light off. Both of these lights can swivel so that the light can be aimed at a specific spot, if desired. The lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off automatically. Interior lighting also comes on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second detent. Map/Reading Lights There is a second light located midway back in the headliner. To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 because a door is open. To restore interior light operation, either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch. Battery Saver Feature To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open. 3 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever The wipers and washers are operated by a switch Rotate the end of the lever to the LO position for on the control lever. The lever is located on the low-speed wiper operation, or to the HI position for high-speed wiper operation. right side of the steering column. 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! • Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off. • Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. Changing Wiper Speeds NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the park position if you turn the ignition switch OFF while they are operating. The wipers will resume operation when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again. Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer control lever to the first detent, and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There are five delay settings, which allow you to UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle Windshield Washers every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer between cycles. control lever toward you and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired. If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the off position, the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles and then turn off. WARNING! Changing Intermittent Settings NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled. Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of (Continued) 3 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use. Mist Feature Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the wipers will continue to operate. NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer Mist Control pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the Headlights With Wipers Feature (Available With windshield. The wash function must be used in order to Automatic Headlights Only) spray the windshield with washer fluid. When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever (on the left side of the steering UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 column) is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. The headlights with wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 3 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column. Tilt/Telescoping Lever To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE column in position, pull the lever upward until fully engaged. WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED Electronic Speed Control Buttons When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over 1 — ON/OFF accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 4 — CANCEL (40 km/h). The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel. 2 — RES + 3 — SET - UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. WARNING! Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it. To Activate To Set A Desired Speed Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use. Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button. To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the 3 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory. Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h). To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) decrease until the button is released. Release the button button and release. Resume can be used at any speed when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). will be established. To Vary The Speed Setting Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph To Resume Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. (1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h). To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed. NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. WARNING! Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED Control. HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery. 3 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels.The HomeLink® indicator is located above the center button. HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® NOTE: Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when before you begin programming. programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons. For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. system. Programming A Rolling Code Erase all channels before you begin programming. To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN For programming garage door openers that were manuposition and press and hold the two outside HomeLink® factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door indicator flashes. opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. 3 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view. 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink® button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button. Training The Garage Door Opener 1 — Door Opener 2 — Training Button 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after Homelink® has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until step after the LEARN button has been pressed. the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button. 6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining activates, programming is complete. steps. NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training. 3 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Programming A Non-Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed. • To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink® To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, button you want to program and the hand-held trans- follow these steps: mitter button. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the not release the button. frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to proming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in remaining steps. view. Canadian/Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada/United States 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button, while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has several seconds of transmission. successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indiCanadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigcator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transfully trained. mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage time-out in the same manner. door may open and close while you are programming. It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light. door or gate motor. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. 3 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and ming is complete and the garage door/device should follow all remaining steps. activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed. • To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, Using HomeLink® repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT To operate, press and release the programmed erase the channels. HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operaprogramming, plug it back in at this time. tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button also be used at any time. To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Security follow these steps: 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle. 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all not release the button. channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here are some of the most common solutions: • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter. • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code. • Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in? If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. WARNING! • Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance. • Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. 3 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The sunroof controls are mounted between the dome/ Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following reading lights. two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: • The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. • The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. Power Sunroof Switch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 WARNING! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the vehicle. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured. • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. Opening Sunroof — Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again. Closing Sunroof — Express Press the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any 3 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof. NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode Venting Sunroof — Express To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again. Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof. Pinch Protect Feature Sunshade Operation This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and release to Express Close. The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 Wind Buffeting Ignition Off Operation Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Sunroof Maintenance The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel. ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets on this vehicle. Both of the power outlets are protected by a fuse. 3 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The instrument panel power outlet, located below the A second power outlet is located inside the center conclimate control knobs, has power available only when the sole. ignition is ON. This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit. Center Console Power Outlet The center console power outlet is powered directly from the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged NOTE: To preserve the heating element, do not hold the into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the engine from starting. lighter in the heating position. Instrument Panel Power Outlet UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® knob and element must be used. CAUTION! • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 3 Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 — #16 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel 2 — #11 Fuse 15 A Blue Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION! To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution. • After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF EQUIPPED An optional ash receiver is available from your authorized dealer and will fit in the center console front cupholder. 3 The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar lighter that can be used with the power outlets. Refer to “Power Outlets” in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further information. CUPHOLDERS Front Cupholders Front Seat Cupholders Rear Cupholders The cupholders in the center console will accommodate either two large size cups or two 20 oz (.5 L) bottles or The rear seat cupholders are located in the armrest cans. The one-peice insert can be easily removed for between the rear seats. Pull down the armrest to use the cleaning. An optional removable ashtray may be located cupholders. in one of the cupholders. 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Cupholders Rear Seat Bottle Holder There are built-in bottle holders located in both rear door trim panels. Rear Bottle Holder WARNING! If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 STORAGE CONSOLE FEATURES Glovebox Storage Compartment Storage The glovebox storage compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel. To open the glovebox, pull outward on the latch handle located on the front of the glovebox. The center console is located between the front driver and passenger seats. The center console armrest slides forward from design position to provide added user comfort. The center console can be used for storage and is also equipped with an electrical power outlet. Refer to “Power Outlets” in “Understanding The Feature of Your Vehicle” for further information. Glovebox Storage Compartment 3 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Center Console Armrest Center Console Storage Two separate storage compartments are also located The top compartment holds small items, such as a pen underneath the armrest. and note pad, while the larger bottom compartment will hold CDs and alike. The bottom compartment also contains a 12 Volt power outlet. The console’s front opening lid allows for easy access to these compartments. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 NOTE: CARGO AREA FEATURES • A notch in the front of the console base allows for use The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying of a cellular phone while it is plugged into the power versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When outlet with the armrest latched down. the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous, • The power outlet can also energize the cigar lighter in nearly flat extension of the load floor. the optional cup holder ash receiver. When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the WARNING! seatback above the seat strap. Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music players, and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury. 3 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback in not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. • The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system. • To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts. • The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle: (Continued) Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible. Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 Ski Pass-Through REAR WINDOW FEATURES There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear seat Rear Window Defroster armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis, to be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and pull The rear window defroster button is located on downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through door. the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time. NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating. Ski Pass-Through 3 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS 䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .204 ▫ EVIC Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 ▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .206 ▫ Average Fuel Economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 䡵 MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .220 ▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 ▫ Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 ▫ Tire PSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 ▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 ▫ Oil Change Required — If Equipped . . . . . . .225 ▫ EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display) . . . .231 ▫ System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 ▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 4 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 䡵 SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . .234 ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .244 䡵 Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 ▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 ▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 ▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 ▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 䡵 Uconnect® 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .235 ▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 ▫ Notes on Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 ▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . .244 䡵 Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO . . . . .244 ▫ LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . . . .256 ▫ INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . . .256 ▫ Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . .257 䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .261 ▫ Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 ▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 ▫ Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 ▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 ▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .270 ▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . .267 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 ▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . .270 ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 ▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .269 4 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 2 3 4 5 — Air Outlet — Side Window Demister Outlet — Instrument Cluster — Ignition Switch — Analog Clock 6 — Radio 7 — Passenger Airbag 8 — Glove Compartment 9 — Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped 10 — Hazard Switch 11 — Storage Compartment 12 — Climate Control 13 — Trunk Release Button 14 — Power Outlet UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 4 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and 1. Temperature Gauge the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera- as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat ture. Any reading below the red mark of the gauge shows from the engine cooling system. that the engine cooling system is operating properly. The 2. Fuel Door Reminder gauge pointer may show a higher than normal temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is heavy stop and go traffic, or when towing a trailer. located on the left side of the vehicle. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. 3. Fuel Gauge When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. There are steps that you can take to slow down an 4. Speedometer impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is Indicates the vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to kilometers per hour (km/h). the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 5. Low Fuel Light If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. When the fuel level drops to approximately 2.0 gallons (7.6 Liters), the fuel symbol will light and 7. Air Bag Warning Light a single chime will sound. This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first NOTE: This light will remain on until a minimum of turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on approximately 3.0 gallons of fuel is added. during starting, stays on, or turns on while 6. Charging System Light driving, have the system inspected at an authorized This light shows the status of the electrical charg- dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” ing system. The light should come on briefly in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly further information. as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while 8. Seat Belt Reminder Light driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s electrical devices, When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/ such as the Front Fog Lights or Rear Window Defroster. RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight If the Charging System Light remains on, it means that seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See your local the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat authorized dealer. belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light will 4 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant 10. Engine Temperature Warning Light Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your This light warns of an overheated engine condiVehicle” for further information. tion. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the 9. Oil Pressure Warning Light gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to light will come on and remain on when the ignition pass H, and a continuous chime will occur until the switch is turned from the OFF to the ON/RUN position, engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes duration is and the light will turn off after the engine is started. If the expired, whichever come first. bulb does not come on during starting, have the system If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and checked by an authorized dealer. stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vethe vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED. normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine. service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To This can be determined using the procedure shown in Do In Emergencies” for further information. “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 11. Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system. The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi- the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and approximately three seconds. The light should then turn the brake fluid level checked. 4 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light PARK. inspected by an authorized dealer. 14. Odometer Display/Trip Odometer Display The light also will turn on when the parking brake is The odometer display shows the total distance the veapplied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posihicle has been driven. tion. U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair 12. Tachometer technician should leave the odometer reading the same The silver area of the scale shows the permissible engine as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range. then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was prevent engine damage. before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to 13. Shift Lever Indicator make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the must be reset at zero. automatic transmission. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and release the Trip Odometer button. To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odometer to be reset then push and hold the button until the display resets (approximately 2 seconds). Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for additional information. gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault HOTOIL . Engine Oil Temperature Exceeds Safe Threshold NOTE: If the instrument cluster is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), then warnings such as ”Low Tire,” “Door Ajar” and Vehicle Odometer Messages “Trunk Ajar” will display in the EVIC. (Refer to “ElecWhen the appropriate conditions exist, the odometer will tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for specific display the following messages: messages). door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar LoW tirE When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer dECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Ajar display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles. LoW tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure CHANgE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required 4 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HOTOIL the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized dealer service center as soon as possible. When this message is displayed there is a engine oil over-temperature condition. When this condition occurs, the “HOTOIL” message will be displayed in the odom- CHANgE OIL eter along with a chime. Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” message will flash Emergencies”. in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the gASCAP next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the in the evaporative system, or the fuel filler cap is loose, engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon improperly installed, or damaged, the words “gASCAP” your personal driving style. will display in the odometer display area. If this occurs, Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odomyou turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position. To turn eter reset button to turn off the “gASCAP” message. off the message temporarily, press and release the Trip (Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System — OBDII” in Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset the oil “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information). If change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform the following procedure: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do 16. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Button not start the engine). Trip Odometer 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly 3 times Press and release this button to change the display from within 10 seconds. odometer to “Trip A.” Press and release it a second time 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. to change the display to “Trip B.” Press and release it a third time to change the display back to the odometer. NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not To reset the trip odometer, first display the trip mileage that you want to reset, “Trip A” or “Trip B.” Then push reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. and hold the button (approximately 2 seconds) until the 4. For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle display resets to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be in Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer. Information Center (EVIC)”. 17. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Indicator Light 15. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped This light informs you of a problem with the This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a Control System is ON. problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be 4 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL drivable and not need towing, however see your autho- 19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator rized dealer for service as soon as possible. Light — If Equipped If the light is flashing when the engine is running you may experience power loss, an elevated/rough idle, and increased brake pedal effort, and your vehicle may require towing. Immediate service is required. This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control system (ESC) has been turned off by the driver. 20. Turn Signal Indicators The light will come on when the ignition switch is first The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior turned on and remain briefly as a bulb check. This is turn signal, when using the turn signal lever. A normal. If the light does not come on during starting, chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile have the system checked by an authorized dealer. (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. 18. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check This indicator will illuminate when the park for a defective outside light bulb. lights or headlights are turned on. 21. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock This light will flash rapidly for approximately Brakes. 16 seconds when the alarm system is arming. The light will begin to flash slowly indicating The ABS warning light should be checked frequently to that the system is armed. The light will stop assure that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key to the on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light flashing when the vehicle is disarmed. should come on. If the light does not come on, have the 23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light — If Equipped system inspected by an authorized dealer. This light monitors the ABS. This light will 24. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/ come on when the ignition key is turned to the Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped ON/RUN position and may stay on for apThe “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator proximately three seconds. Light” in the instrument cluster will come on If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving, it when the ignition switch is turned to the indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is ON/RUN position. It should go out with the not functioning and that service is required, however, the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Inconventional brake system will continue to operate nordicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine mally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not on. running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition 22. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped 4 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles 25. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see Each tire, including the spare (if provided), your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the should be checked monthly when cold and problem diagnosed and corrected. inflated to the inflation pressure recommended NOTE: by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on movehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those ON/RUN. tires.) • Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation. (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS CAUTION! low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc- The TPMS has been optimized for the original equiption indicator to indicate when the system is not operating ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined have been established for the tire size equipped on with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one damage may result when using replacement equipment minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftersequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use tire as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal- result. functions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on 4 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 26. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from LOCK to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. CAUTION! Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. WARNING! A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 27. Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If Equipped WARNING! This light indicates that the transmission fluid If you continue operating the vehicle when the temperature is running hot. This may occur Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumiwith severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in light turns on while driving, safely pull over contact with hot engine or exhaust components and and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into cause a fire. NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the 28. High Beam Indicator light turns off. This light indicates that the headlights are on high beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steerCAUTION! ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam. Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera29. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Disture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause play — If Equipped severe transmission damage or transmission failure. This display shows the EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for further information. 4 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED Control Buttons The Mini-Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster and features a driver-interactive trip information and temperature display. NOTE: The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving. Mini-Trip Control Buttons STEP Button Press the STEP button located on the steering wheel to scroll through sub menus (i.e., Temperature, Trip Functions: Odometer, Trip A, Trip B). UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 RESET Button To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the ON position, then press and hold the RESET button located on the steering wheel. The following displays can be reset or changed: • Trip A • Trip B Trip Odometer (ODO) This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset. Press and release the STEP button on the instrument cluster to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B. Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset. Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset. 4 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED The EVIC consists of the following: • The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the • instrument cluster. • Compass Heading Display (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW) Mileage (Avg/MPG) Miles To Empty • Low Tire Information (Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) Displays) — if equipped • Timer • Units • System Warnings (Door Ajar, etc.) • Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) • Outside Temperature Display (°F or °C) Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) • Audio Mode Displays – 12 preset Radio Stations or CD Title and Track number when playing UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 The system allows the driver to select information by MENU Button pressing the following buttons on the instrument panel Press and release the MENU button to advance switch bank located below the climate controls: the display to each of the EVIC Main Menu features. Upon reaching the last item in the Main Menu the EVIC will advance to the first item in the Main Menu with the next MENU button press and release. DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to advance the display through the various Trip Functions or Personal Settings. COMPASS Button EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons Press and release the COMPASS button to display the compass heading, the outside temperature, and Audio Info (when the radio is on) screen when the current screen is not the compass, outside temp, audio info screen. 4 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SELECT Button • RKE (Remote Keyless Entry) Battery Low (with a single chime) Press and release the SELECT Button to accept a selection. The SELECT Button also resets • various Trip Functions. • Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) • Displays When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays the following messages: • Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime after one mile traveled) Personal Settings Not Avail – Vehicle Not In PARK Personal Settings Not Avail – Vehicle in Motion Door Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which door is open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion). • Doors Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which doors are open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion). • Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime) • Trunk Open (with vehicle graphic showing and open trunk and A single chime ) • Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime) • Lights On • Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single • Key In Ignition chime) • Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime) • Remote start aborted — Door ajar UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 • Remote start aborted — Hood ajar • Remote start aborted — Trunk ajar • Remote start aborted — Fuel low • Remote start disabled — System fault • Oil Change Required (with a single chime) • Low Tire (with a graphic of the car showing which tire(s) is/are low - with a single chime and ⬙Inflate to XX⬙). Refer to ⬙Tire Pressure Monitoring System⬙ in ⬙Starting and Operating⬙. flash in the EVIC display for approximately five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style. Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform the following procedure: • Check TPM System (with a single chime) Refer to ⬙Tire Pressure Monitoring System⬙ in ⬙Starting and Operat- 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not start the engine.) ing⬙. Oil Change Required — If Equipped 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds. Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 4 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you • Elapsed Time start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not • EVIC Units Selection reset. If necessary repeat this procedure. • System Status EVIC Main Menu To step to each main menu feature press and release the • Personal Settings MENU button once for each step. A step from the last item in the list will cause the first item in the feature list to be displayed. The following features are in the Main menu: NOTE: For features in the EVIC that can be reset (Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time), the EVIC prompts a reset with a SELECT button graphic and the word RESET next to it. • Compass When the SELECT button is pressed, the selected feature will reset and RESET ALL will display next to the SELECT button graphic. Pressing SELECT a second time will reset both Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time. After three seconds without pressing SELECT, RESET ALL will return to RESET and only the selected feature will have been reset. • Outside Temperature • Audio Information (if radio is on) display • Average Fuel Economy • Distance to Empty • Tire Pressure Status display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Compass Display COMPASS Button The compass heading indicates the direction the vehicle is facing. Press and release the compass button to display one of eight compass headings, the outside temperature, and audio information (if the radio is on) if the EVIC display is not already displaying this screen. Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to calibrate the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will flash the “CAL” indicator until the compass is calibrated. You may calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator in the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally. NOTE: The system will display the last known outside NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and an temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to environment free from large metallic objects such as buildbe driven several minutes before the updated tempera- ings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc. ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving. 4 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Manual Compass Calibration Compass Variance If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the vari- Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic ance has been properly set, you may wish to manually North and Geographic North. To compensate for the recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the compass: differences, the variance should be set for the zone where 1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the to enter the EVIC Programming Menus. differences and provide the most accurate compass head2. Press and release the MENU button until “Personal ing. Settings” displays in the EVIC. NOTE: Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as 3. Press and release the DOWN button until “Calibrate cell phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops) Compass Yes” displays in the EVIC. should be kept away from the top of the instrument 4. Press and release the SELECT button and the “CAL” panel. This is where the compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false compass indicator will start flashing. readings. 5. Drive the vehicle slowly (under 5 mph / 8 km/h), completing one or more circles (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now function normally. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 3. Press and release the DOWN button until “Compass Variance” and the current Variance Value displays in the EVIC. 4. Press and release the SELECT button to increment the Variance Value by one, (one button press per update), until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map. NOTE: The Variance Values will wrap around from 15 back to 1. The Default Variance is Zone 8. Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. Average Fuel Economy can be reset by pressing and holding the SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Leave the display). Upon reset, the history information will be shift lever in PARK. erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel 2. Press and release the MENU button until “Personal average reading before the reset. Settings” displays in the EVIC. Compass Variance Map To Change Compass Variance: 4 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Distance To Empty (DTE) Tire PSI Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset. Press and release the MENU button until ⬙Tire PSI⬙ is displayed. Tire pressure information is displayed as follows: • If tire pressure is OK for all tires, TIRE and a vehicle graphic are displayed with tire pressure values in each NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle corner or the graphic. loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of • If one or more tires have low pressure, LOW TIRE, the vehicle, regardless of the DTE display value. ⬙Inflate to XX” and a vehicle graphic are displayed When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) with tire pressure values in each corner of the graphic. estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change Tire pressure values that are too low will be flashing. to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL”. This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a • If the Tire Pressure System requires service, ⬙Check significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the TPM System⬙ is displayed. Tire PSI is an information LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display. only function and cannot be reset. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 Elapsed Time Pressure features. Press and Release the SELECT button to toggle units between ⬙U.S.⬙ and ⬙METRIC⬙. Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is System Status in the RUN or START position. Displays SYSTEM OK if there are no active Warning Elapsed time is displayed as follows: Messages stored. Pressing and releasing the DOWN button when SYSTEM OK is displayed will do nothing. • Hours Displays SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT if there are • Minutes active Warning Messages stored. Pressing and releasing the DOWN button when SYSTEM WARNINGS PRES• Seconds ENT is displayed will display each stored warning for Elapsed time can be reset by pressing and holding the each button press. Press and Release the MENU button to SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC display). Upon return to the Main Menu. reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start incrementing again if the ignition switch is in RUN or Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) START. Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display) features when the automatic transaxle is in PARK. Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature, Average Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty and Tire 4 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Press and release the MENU button until “Personal RKE Unlock Settings” displays in the EVIC. When “Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, only the Press and release the DOWN button to display the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When following programmable features: Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE Language transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenWhen in this display you may select different languages ger’s doors. When “All Doors 1st Press” is selected, all of for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions. the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE Pressing the SELECT button while in this display selects transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, or Dutch de- press and release the SELECT button until “Driver Door pending on availability. As you continue, the displayed 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears. information will be shown in the selected language. Sound Horn with Lock Auto Unlock on Exit When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when When ON is selected and the transaxle is in the PARK or the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature NEUTRAL position, all doors will unlock when the may be selected with or without the Flash Lamp with driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, press the Lock feature. To make your selection, press and release SELECT button until ON or OFF appears. the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will selection, press the SELECT button until ON or OFF flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the appears. RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn on lock feature selected. To NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime make your selection, press and release the SELECT causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the button until ON or OFF appears. brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.” Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to Key-Off Power Delay Flash Lamp with Lock have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds When this feature is selected, the power window when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press switches, radio, Uconnect® phone (if equipped), and the SELECT button until 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds appears. power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Headlamps With Wipers (Available with Auto Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature. Headlights Only) To make your selection, press the SELECT button until When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the Off, 45 sec., 5 min., or 10 min. appears. AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The 4 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Illumin. Approach SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To make your selection, press the SELECT button until “OFF,” “30 sec,” “60 sec,” or “90 sec” appears. To set the analog clock, located at the top center of the instrument panel, press and hold the button in until the setting is correct. The clock will adjust slowly at first and then quicker the longer the button is held. Display Units In The EVIC and odometer can be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until “U.S.” or “METRIC” appears. Compass Variance Refer to “Compass Display” for more information. Calibrate Compass Refer to “Compass Display” for more information. Setting The Analog Clock UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED Uconnect® 130 Refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual for detailed operating instructions. Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) — If Equipped 4 Refer to “Voice Command” for further details. Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If Equipped Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details. Uconnect® 130 Operating Instructions — Radio Mode NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio. 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping, until you release it. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second TIME Button time to turn off the radio. Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency. Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 Clock Setting Procedure degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning 1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume, and to the left decreases it. 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob. When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played. 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes SEEK Buttons will begin to blink. Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL conto seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio trol knob to save time change. will remain tuned to the new station until you make UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL RW/FF control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons mid-range tones. causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL AM or FM frequencies. control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the TUNE Control treble tones. 5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds. Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade sound level from the right or left side speakers. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones. knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers. 4 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM exit setting tone, balance, and fade. and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. AM/FM Button The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode. pressing the pushbutton twice. SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display. When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory. Buttons 1 - 6 You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations). DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to Disc modes. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will NOTE: show the track number, and index time in minutes and • The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1. to operate the radio. Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks. Inserting Compact Disc(s) Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded. CAUTION! • This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism. • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism. • The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded. (Continued) 4 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION! (Continued) • Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can cause damage to the player. EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes. TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within playing time display to a small CD playing time display. 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, RW/FF the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) convertible or soft-top models (if equipped). button works in a similar manner. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 AM/FM Button Supported Media (Disc Types) Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3. SET/RND Button (Random Play Button) Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 compact disc in random order to provide an interesting Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. change of pace. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nordomly selected track. mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. Press the RND button a second time to stop Random The radio uses the following limits for file systems: Play. • Maximum number of folder levels: 8 Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 • Maximum number of files: 255 file recording media and formats are limited. When • Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricnames and folder names is limited. For large numbers of tions. files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display 4 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL the file name and folder name, and will assign a number Supported MP3 File Formats instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extenfolders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceedsion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 ing 50 folders will result in this display.) extension may cause playback problems. The radio is • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- not play the file. character extension) When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the character extension) following table are supported. In addition, variable bit Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). VBR bit rate. Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 MPEG Specification MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 Sampling Frequency (kHz) 48, 44.1, 32 MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16 Bit Rate (kbps) 320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32 160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8 Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files. Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following: • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title to load than non-multisession discs are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not • Number of files and folders - Loading times will supported by the radios. increase with more files and folders Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended supported. to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc. 4 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an MP3 player, or iPod®, and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers. Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected. NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down. Uconnect® 130 TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) Press this button to change the display to time of day. The Operating Instructions — Radio Mode time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC OFF). position to operate the radio. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping, until you release it. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped time to turn off the radio. Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle.” Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone — If degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning Equipped the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature volume, and to the left decreases it. (if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” in “UnderWhen the audio system is turned on, the sound will be standing The Features If Your Vehicle.” set at the same volume level as last played. If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not SEEK Buttons available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch screen. to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make 4 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature will begin to blink. (if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.” 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL conIf your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not trol knob to save time change. available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds. screen. The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the TIME Button SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, and radio frequency. starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite Clock Setting Procedure radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2. 1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. Phone Button Uconnect® Phone — If Equipped 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text mid-range tones. message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third RW/FF time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the treble tones. direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth AM or FM frequencies. time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ TUNE Control SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise sound level from the right or left side speakers. INFO Button to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS the front and rear speakers. will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones. 4 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade. MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information. Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types: Program Type No program type or undefined Adult Hits 16-Digit Character Display None Adlt Hit Program Type Classical Classic Rock College Country Foreign Language Information Jazz News Nostalgia Oldies Personality Public Rhythm and Blues Religious Music 16-Digit Character Display Classicl Cls Rock College Country Language Inform Jazz News Nostalga Oldies Persnlty Public R&B Rel Musc UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Program Type Religious Talk Rock Soft Soft Rock Soft Rhythm and Blues Sports Talk Top 40 Weather 16-Digit Character Display Rel Talk Rock Soft Soft Rck Soft R&B Sports Talk Top 40 Weather If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station. SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items: • Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon save time change. is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name. The AM/FM Button Music Type function only operates when in the FM Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. mode. 4 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display. When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/ RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory. Buttons 1 - 6 You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice. These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations). DISC/AUX Button Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode. Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE: • The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks. Inserting Compact Disc(s) Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded. If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1. CAUTION! • This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism. • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism. • The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded. • Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can cause damage to the player. 4 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes. TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within playing time display to a small CD playing time display. 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, RW/FF the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button convertible or soft-top models (if equipped). works in a similar manner. SEEK Button AM/FM Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 SET/RND Button (Random Play Button) Supported Media (Disc Types) Press this button while the CD is playing to activate The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3. compact disc in random order to provide an interesting Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) change of pace. The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran- Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. domly selected track. When reading discs recorded using formats other than Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran- ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nordom Play. mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio uses the following limits for file systems: The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When • Maximum number of folder levels: 8 writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric• Maximum number of files: 255 tions. • Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to 4 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL display the file name and folder name, and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.) • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension) • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension) Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file. When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. VBR bit rates. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 MPEG Specification MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 Sampling Frequency (kHz) 48, 44.1, 32 MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16 Bit Rate (kbps) 320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32 160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8 Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files. Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following: • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios. • Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported. 4 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc. Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ priority mode. LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display. Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files). The folder list will time out after five seconds. INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available). Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file. Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or iPod® and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers. Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down. NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska. System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) that is included with the factory-installed satellite radio Press this button to change the display to time of day. The system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that time of day will display for five seconds (when the contains general information, including how to setup your on-line listening account. For further information, call the ignition is OFF). toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents. Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Number (ESN/SID) Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, Please have the following information available when sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chilcalling: dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. 1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID). 4 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2. Your Vehicle Identification Number. Satellite Antenna To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps: To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna. ESN/SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number Reception Quality display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the the radio to exit this screen. following reasons: Selecting Uconnect® (Satellite) Mode • The vehicle is parked in an underground parking Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A structure or under a physical obstacle. CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode. • Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes. • Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 • Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can SCAN Button cause signal blockage. Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before conOperating Instructions - Uconnect® (Satellite) tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN Mode button a second time. NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or INFO Button ACC position to operate the radio. SEEK Buttons Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return to normal display). Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass channels RW/FF without stopping until you release it. Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows. 4 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL TUNE Control (Rotary) SETUP Button Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel. following items: • Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/ SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button Sirius subscription. or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se- SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory lected. When you are receiving a channel that you wish to Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. type. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type and press and release that button. If a button is not function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next selected within five seconds after pressing the SET butchannel with the same selected Music Type name. ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type stored into pushbutton memory. (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel. MUSIC TYPE Button UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice. iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port, located in the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls. iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please visit Apple’s website for software updates. Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding NOTE: button number will display. • If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate Uconnect® Multimedia radio User’s Manual for These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you iPod® or external USB device support capability. commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations). • Connecting an iPod® or consumer electronic audio Operating Instructions - Uconnect® Phone (If device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate, Equipped) plays media, but does not use the iPod® /MP3 control Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” in “Understanding The feature to control the connected device. Features Of Your Vehicle.” Buttons 1 - 6 4 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external the vehicle’s iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is external USB device may take a few minutes to connect), the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by located in the center of the instrument panel below the pressing radio switches, as described below. climate controls. Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/ MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained. Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/ MP3 control system may charge it to the required level. Using This Feature By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB device to connect to the USB port: USB Connector Port • The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) information on the radio display. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 • The audio device can be controlled using the radio mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents. faceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external USB device and display data: • The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific • Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track. audio device). • Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device playing a track, skips to the next track or press the Using Radio Buttons VR button and say ⬙Next Track.⬙ To get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and • Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click, access a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” will jump to the previous track in the list or press the button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and VR button and say ⬙Previous Track.⬙ say ⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB.⬙ Once in the iPod®/USB/ MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio • Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system. long enough will jump to the beginning of the current Play Mode track. When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the • Jump forward in the current track by pressing and iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play holding the FF>> button. 4 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will • Press the SCAN button to use iPod®/USB/MP3 dejump backward or forward respectively, for five secvice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the onds. next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the • Use the << SEEK and SEEK>> buttons to jump to the desired track, when it is playing the track, press the previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK>> button SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the during play mode will jump to the next track in the << SEEK and SEEK>> buttons will select the previous list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous and next tracks. Track.⬙ • RND button (available on sales code RES radio only): • While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod® or external USB for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or to the next screen of data for that track. Once all ⬙Shuffle Off.⬙ If the RND icon is showing on the radio screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press display, then the shuffle mode is ON. will go back to the play mode screen on the radio. • Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat Off.⬙ UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 List Or Browse Mode During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device. • TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device or external USB device. • Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display, press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable. • During all List modes, the iPod® displays all lists in “wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclockwise) to get to the track faster. • In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or external USB device. • Preset 1 – Playlists • Preset 2 – Artists • Preset 3 – Albums • Preset 4 – Genres • Preset 5 – Audiobooks • Preset 6 – Podcasts • Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line. 4 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode. • LIST button: The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod® or external USB device. Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device sub-menu levels are available on this system. • MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device. CAUTION! • Leaving the iPod® or external USB device (or any supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s guidelines. • Placing items on the iPod® or external USB device, or connections to the iPod® or external USB device in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device and/or to the connectors. WARNING! Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external USB device while driving. Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and following the beep, say ⬙Setup⬙, then say ⬙Select Audio Devices.⬙ Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Uconnect® phone system. 3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect® phone system to list the audio devices. Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons To enter BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on the Next Track Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth Stream- Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the ing Audio.” radio and say “Next Track,” to jump to the next music track on your cellular phone. Play Mode When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect® phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected and played. Previous Track Selecting A Different Audio Device Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is playing will display info. 1. Press the PHONE button to begin. Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on the radio and say “Previous Track,” to jump to the previous music track on your cellular phone. Browse 4 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED The right-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or to CD mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle. The left-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand switch is different, depending on which mode you are in. The following describes the left-hand rocker switch operation in each mode. Radio Operation Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel) Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station, and pressing the bottom of the switch The remote sound system controls are located on the rear will SEEK down for the next listenable station. surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine o’clock positions. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 The button located in the center of the left-hand switch CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following grammed in the radio preset pushbutton. precautions: CD Player 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next surface. track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the wiping from center to edge. beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play. 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc. If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track; three times, it will play the third, etc. The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no function in this mode. 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays. 5. Store the disc in its case after playing. 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high. 4 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service. CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather. Manual Heating And Air Conditioning RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect® (if equipped). Manual Temperature Control UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of Temperature Control outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures. Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the “O” (OFF) position. There are four blower NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower speeds. than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind climate controls will not function during Remote Start the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off) fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, position. reducing air conditioning performance. 4 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Air Conditioning Control Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged. Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures. • ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then, select Panel, Bi-Level or Floor mode and move the temperature control to the desired temperature. Mode Control (Air Direction) Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air distribution. You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the con• MAX A/C trol, or a blend of two of these modes. For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation The closer the setting is to a particular buttons at the same time. symbol, the more air distribution you receive from that mode. NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 • Panel • Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a Air is directed through the outlets in the instrusmall amount flowing through the defrost and ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct side window demist outlets. airflow. NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed • Mix so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side for maximum airflow to the rear. window demist outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the • Bi-Level windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. while reducing moisture on the windshield. NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there • Defrost is a difference in temperature between the upper and Air is directed through the windshield and side lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets. window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxiThis feature gives improved comfort during sunny but mum blower and temperature settings for best windcool conditions. shield and side window defrosting. 4 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix, • The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air weather will cause windows to fog on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehuthe outside air position for maximum defogging. midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary. • The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging • Recirculation Control when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or Bi-Level. Pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation • Recirculated air is not allowed in Defrost modes. If the mode. This can be used when outside condiRecirculation button is pressed while in Defrost mode, tions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high the LED indicator will flash several times then go out. humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause Recirculation will be disabled automatically when the LED in the control button to illuminate. Defrost mode is selected. NOTE: • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. • Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK Extended use of this mode is not recommended. position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger. Operation of the system is quite simple. 1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only. Automatic Temperature Control Automatic Operation Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob. Once the comfort level is selected, the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system. Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning, the system will automatically make the adjustment. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply The Automatic Temperature Control system automati- allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at 4 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake. the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance. 72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person; however, this may vary. • While operating in AUTO, the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the NOTE: windshield. The defrost mode must be manually se• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime lected to clear the windshield and side glass. without affecting automatic operation. Manual Operation • Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in This system offers a full complement of manual override AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic, to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the Automatic. This means the operator can override the air conditioning is not necessary. blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower range • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than for times when the AUTO setting is not desired. The blower expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or Control knob (on the left). insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 4 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to • Floor change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control Air is directed through the floor outlets with a knob (on the right) to one of the following positions. small amount flowing through the defrost and • Panel side window demist outlets. Air is directed through the outlets in the instru- • Mix ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side airflow. window demist outlets. This setting works best in NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort for maximum airflow to the rear. while reducing moisture on the windshield. • Bi-Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. • Defrost Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxiNOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there mum blower and temperature settings for best windis a difference in temperature between the upper and shield and side window defrosting. lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 • Air Conditioner Control NOTE: Press this button to turn on the air • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled. conditioning during manual operation only. When the air conditioning is • In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may turned on, cool dehumidified air will lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation flow through the outlets selected with mode is not allowed in defrost, in order to improve the Mode control dial. Press this butwindow clearing. Recirculation will be disabled autoton a second time to turn OFF the air matically if Defrost is selected. conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when • Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to manual compressor operation is selected. fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog, press the • Recirculation Control Recirculation button to return to outside air. Some temp/ humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to The system will automatically control recircucondense on windows and hamper visibility. For this lation. However, pressing the Recirculation reason, the system will not allow Recirculation to be Control button will temporarily put the system selected while in defrost. Attempting to use the recircuin recirculation mode. This can be used when lation while in Defrost will cause the LED in the control outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high button to blink and then turn off. humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate. 4 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However, under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode, the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When these conditions are present, and the Recirculation button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn off. This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first move the Mode knob to Panel, Mix and then press the Recirculation button. This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging. Blower Control For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation, turn the knob to the AUTO position. In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individual selected. In off position the blower will shut off. Operating Tips NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions. Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended. Window Fogging Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly reVehicle” for proper coolant selection. moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Mix mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and Winter Operation provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging beUse of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months comes a problem, increase blower speed. Vehicle winis not recommended because it may cause window dows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid fogging. weather. Vacation Storage NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service long periods as fogging may occur. (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air Side Window Demisters conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure A side window demister outlet is located at each end of adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct of compressor damage when the system is started again. air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors. 4 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Outside Air Intake A/C Air Filter — If Equipped Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service. Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter service intervals. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions 4 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS 䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .296 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 ▫ Four-Speed Automatic Transmission — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 ▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 ▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 ▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 ▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .293 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .293 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 ▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (62TE) — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 䡵 AUTOSTICK® – IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .314 ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 5 286 STARTING AND OPERATING 䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 ▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 ▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 䡵 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) . . . . . . . . .321 䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .323 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .324 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .324 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .325 ▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .333 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .335 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .336 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .341 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 ▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .343 ▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 ▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 STARTING AND OPERATING 287 ▫ Run Flat Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 ▫ Spare Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .364 ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 ▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .352 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .353 䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .354 ▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 ▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 ▫ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .359 ▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 ▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 5 288 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 ▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 ▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 ▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 ▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 ▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 ▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 ▫ Loose Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 ▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 ▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .374 ▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .374 ▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 ▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 ▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 ▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 ▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .388 ▫ Recreational Towing – All Models . . . . . . . . . .389 STARTING AND OPERATING 289 STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING! (Continued) Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. WARNING! • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. (Continued) • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Automatic Transmission The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear. 5 290 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed. • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. Normal Starting NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. For vehicles not equipped with Tip Start (Four-Speed Transmission), turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. For vehicles equipped with Tip Start (Six-Speed Transmission), turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. STARTING AND OPERATING 291 Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C) To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended. If Engine Fails To Start WARNING! • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. • If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. Without Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all 5 292 STARTING AND OPERATING the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the With Tip Start engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the If the engine fails to start after you have followed the engine is flooded. “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push CAUTION! the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this 15 seconds before trying again. occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition If the engine is flooded, it may start to run, but not have switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then enough power to continue running when the key is repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. released. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to CAUTION! the floor. To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15- seconds before trying again. second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor, repeat the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures. STARTING AND OPERATING 293 After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution. The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a CAUTION! grounded, three-wire extension cord. The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: hour to have an adequate warning effect on the engine. • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood a complete stop. between the headlight assembly and the Totally Inte- • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle grated Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver’s side of has come to a complete stop and the engine is at the vehicle. idle speed. (Continued) 5 294 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 295 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK position. The key can only be removed from the ignition 5 296 STARTING AND OPERATING when the ignition is in the LOCK position, and once Four-Speed Automatic Transmission — If removed, the transmission is locked in PARK. Equipped NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service. Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed. The transmission gear position display (located in the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers). Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears. STARTING AND OPERATING 297 the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a NEUTRAL into another gear range. downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to grade. allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold. WARNING! Gear Ranges PARK (P) This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle. (Continued) 5 298 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. (Continued) (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 299 WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result. • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position: • When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated. • Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position. 5 300 STARTING AND OPERATING • With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK. REVERSE (R) This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. NEUTRAL (N) Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle. WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. DRIVE (D) Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe (Continued) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission STARTING AND OPERATING 301 automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris- converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter tics under all normal operating conditions. Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold temperaWhen frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as tures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condilimited to second gear only. Normal operation will retions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or sume once the transmission temperature has risen to a while towing heavy trailers), select the ⬙3⬙ range. Under suitable level. these conditions, using the ⬙3⬙ range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing exces- DRIVE 3 (3) sive shifting and heat buildup. This range eliminates shifts into fourth gear. The transmission will operate normally in first and second gear. Shifts into third may be delayed to provide second gear operation at higher speeds. Using the ⬙3⬙ range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life During cold temperatures, transmission operation may by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. The ⬙3⬙ be modified depending on engine and transmission range should also be used when descending steep grades temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im- to avoid brake system distress. proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the DRIVE and “3” range shift points. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating. 5 302 STARTING AND OPERATING In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the Use this range for engine braking when descending very following steps: steep grades. In this range, the transmission will downshift for maximum engine braking, and upshifts will 1. Stop the vehicle. occur only to prevent engine overspeed. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. Transmission Limp Home Mode 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home 5. Restart the engine. Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operoperation. ate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomdriven to an authorized dealer for service without dam- mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your aging the transmission. earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. LOW (L) STARTING AND OPERATING 303 If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer Torque Converter Clutch service is required. A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. Overdrive Operation A clutch within the torque converter engages automatiThe automatic transmission includes an electronically cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly controlled Overdrive (fourth gear). The transmission will different feeling or response during normal operation in automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conthe upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during ditions are present: some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages. • the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, • the transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature, • the engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature, • vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and • the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator. 5 304 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. Shifting between the DRIVE and 3 ranges, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive. Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (62TE) — If Equipped The transmission gear position display (located in the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers). Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears. The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick® shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further information). Moving the shift lever into the AutoStick® position (below the Drive position) activates AutoStick® mode, providing manual shift control and displaying the current gear in the instrument cluster. STARTING AND OPERATING 305 NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold. PARK (P) This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking Shift Lever brake. Gear Ranges When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on NEUTRAL into another gear range. the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult 5 306 STARTING AND OPERATING to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. WARNING! • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 307 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) 5 308 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result. • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. • Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position. • With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK. REVERSE (R) This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. NEUTRAL (N) The following indicators should be used to ensure that Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posiperiods with the engine running. The engine may be tion: started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift • When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle. all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated. STARTING AND OPERATING 309 WARNING! Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. DRIVE (D) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second, third, and fourth gears, direct fifth gear and overdrive sixth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. 5 310 STARTING AND OPERATING During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be limited to third gear only. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level. Transmission Limp Home Mode PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission. In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps: 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Transmission function is monitored electronically for 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could 5. Restart the engine. result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. operation. STARTING AND OPERATING 311 NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom- • The engine coolant has reached an adequate temperamend that you visit your authorized dealer at your ture. earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has • The vehicle speed is sufficiently high. diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. • The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer Torque Converter Clutch service is required. A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. Overdrive Operation A clutch within the torque converter engages automatiThe automatic transmission includes an electronically cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will different feeling or response during normal operation in automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conthe upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during ditions are present: some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages. • The shift lever is in the DRIVE position. • The transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature. 5 312 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. Using the AutoStick® shift control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive. Operation When the shift lever is in the AutoStick® position (below the DRIVE position), it can be moved from side to side. This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever to the left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift. The current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right AUTOSTICK® – IF EQUIPPED (+) or left (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear providing manual shift control, giving you more control until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize en- described below. gine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and down- • The transmission will automatically downshift to first shifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver system can also provide you with more control during should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain vehicle is accelerated. driving, trailer towing, and many other situations. STARTING AND OPERATING 313 • You can start out, from a stop, in any gear except top • If the system detects a problem, it will disable gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in AutoStick® mode and the transmission will return to automatic mode until the problem is corrected. second gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions. To disengage AutoStick® mode, return the shift lever to • The transmission will automatically upshift when nec- the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick® position at any time without taking your foot essary to prevent engine over-speed. off the accelerator pedal. • If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur. • Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is engaged. • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick® is engaged. • If the system detects powertrain overheating, the transmission will revert to automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off. WARNING! Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury. 5 314 STARTING AND OPERATING DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Traction Acceleration When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed: Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front (driving) wheels. WARNING! Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy. 2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. 3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible. 4. Keep tires properly inflated. 5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. STARTING AND OPERATING 315 DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water Driving through water more than a few inches/ Although your vehicle is capable of driving through centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water, consider the following Caution safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. and Warning before doing so. Flowing/Rising Water WARNING! Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. CAUTION! • Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. • Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. (Continued) 5 316 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! • Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. • Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost. STARTING AND OPERATING 317 If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers. WARNING! Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. NOTE: • Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system. • Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system. CAUTION! Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible. Damage to the power steering pump may occur. 5 318 STARTING AND OPERATING Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. WARNING! Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended power steering fluid. If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. STARTING AND OPERATING 319 possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking completely. brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will illuminate. PARKING BRAKE NOTE: • When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle. • This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. Parking Brake When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front The parking brake lever is located in the center console. wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking 5 320 STARTING AND OPERATING brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle. WARNING! • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 321 WARNING! (Continued) • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. CAUTION! If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate the hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and avoid skidding on slippery surfaces. WARNING! • Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. • The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. • The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. (Continued) 5 322 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) • The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning Light” is not on. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as possible. If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remain on, the Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) and Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) Systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. See your authorized dealer. When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h). STARTING AND OPERATING 323 ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops. You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into anti-lock: • The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop). • The clicking sound of solenoid valves. WARNING! The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals. All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and • Brake pedal pulsations. type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end accurate signals for the computer. of the stop. ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM These are all normal characteristics of ABS. Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All 5 324 STARTING AND OPERATING systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) WARNING! (Continued) very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. Traction Control System (TCS) This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake WARNING! pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those re- across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine (Continued) torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. STARTING AND OPERATING 325 This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section of this manual. Brake Assist System (BAS) WARNING! • The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. • The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer Electronic Stability Control (ESC) desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is This system enhances directional control and stability of deactivated. the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying 5 326 STARTING AND OPERATING the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition • Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position. • Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. WARNING! Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. STARTING AND OPERATING 327 ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes.: intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for almost all driving situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons as noted below. 5 Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch (located in the lower switch bank below the heater/air conditioning controls). When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability features of ESC function normally, with the exception of engine power reduction. This mode is ESC Off Switch 328 STARTING AND OPERATING To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or operation. gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off” mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off” WARNING! mode is overcome, turn ESC on again by momentarily When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in the vehicle is in motion. the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Par- ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And tial Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is ESC OFF Indicator Light disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ECS system is reduced. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this STARTING AND OPERATING 329 light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the NOTE: vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authoActivation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on morized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON. diagnosed and corrected. • Each time the ignition is cycled ON, the ESC system The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lowill be ON even if it was cycled off previously. cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/ when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acthat caused the ESC activation. celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the driving to the prevailing road conditions. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off 5 330 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings NOTE: • P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H. • European-Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 — Size Designation 3 — Service Description 4 — Maximum Load 5 — Maximum Pressure 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades • LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. STARTING AND OPERATING 331 • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Size Designation: P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards T or S = Temporary spare tire 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) — Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) 5 332 STARTING AND OPERATING EXAMPLE: R = Construction code — ⬙R⬙ means radial construction — ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction 15 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index — A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol — A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions — The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) STARTING AND OPERATING 333 EXAMPLE: Load Identification: ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire Light Load (LL) = Light load tire C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Tire Identification Number (TIN) 5 334 STARTING AND OPERATING EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation — This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) — 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) — 01 means the year 2001 — Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 STARTING AND OPERATING 335 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Maximum Inflation Pressure Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Tire Placard Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures. 5 336 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. B-Pillar Location for Tire And Loading Information Placard STARTING AND OPERATING 337 Tire And Loading Information Placard 2) Total weight your vehicle can carry. 3) Tire size designed for your vehicle. 4) Told tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual. Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the: 1) Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in this section. 5 338 STARTING AND OPERATING To determine the maximum loading conditions of your 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs the weight referenced here. (340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) = 650 lbs [295 kg]). Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occubeing loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard. capacity calculated in Step 4. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasmanual to determine how this reduces the available sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg. cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 339 NOTE: • The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle. • For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). 5 340 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING AND OPERATING 341 WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: Safety WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. (Continued) 5 342 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering. NOTE: • Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response. • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right. Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door. At least once a month: • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgeProper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability STARTING AND OPERATING 343 CAUTION! After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not outside temperature condition. been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low. tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditemperature changes. tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle 5 344 STARTING AND OPERATING loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- Radial Ply Tires tion. Refer to your authorized tire or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, WARNING! loading and cold tire inflation pressures. Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle WARNING! poorly. The instability could cause a collision. AlHigh speed driving with your vehicle under maxiways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your combine them with other types of tires. tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Tire Repair maximum capacity at continuous speeds above If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it 75 mph (120 km/h). meets the following criteria: • The tire has not been driven on when flat. • The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable). • The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm). STARTING AND OPERATING 345 Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped additional information. Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- on ice. Summer tires will not contain the all season diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to service description (Load Index and Speed Code). do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of Tire Types your vehicle. All Season Tires – If Equipped Snow Tires All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring, Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary beduring the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a tween different all season tires. All season tires can be mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only handling of your vehicle. in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. 5 346 STARTING AND OPERATING Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types. Run Flat Tires – If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode. See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information. Spare Tires – If Equipped NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. STARTING AND OPERATING 347 CAUTION! Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel – If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern. Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 80D18 103M. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. 5 348 STARTING AND OPERATING Do not install more than one compact spare tire and spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as wheel on the vehicle at any given time. your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. WARNING! Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Full Size Spare – If Equipped original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size STARTING AND OPERATING 349 WARNING! Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not replaced. spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping. Tire Spinning 5 350 STARTING AND OPERATING tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information. Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to: • Driving style • Tire pressure • Distance driven • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended. These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the 1 — Worn Tire 2 — New Tire STARTING AND OPERATING 351 WARNING! Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a with oil, grease, and gasoline. wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match Replacement Tires those of the original wheels. The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators.” Refer to the Tire and Loading It is recommended you contact your authorized tire or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. 5 352 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. (Continued) CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices are not recommended. STARTING AND OPERATING 353 CAUTION! Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed. The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at does not apply to some directional tires that must not be different loads and perform different steering, driving, reversed. and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. 5 354 STARTING AND OPERATING The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will Tire Rotation also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) there should be no adjustment for this increased presThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the sure. driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire mended cold placard pressure. pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire. STARTING AND OPERATING 355 The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. 5 356 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! • The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. NOTE: • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition. • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” STARTING AND OPERATING 357 • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a ⬙LOW Base System TIRE⬙ message will be displayed for a minimum of five The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless seconds and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to in one or more of the four active road tires. An ⬙Inflate to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each XX⬙ message will also be displayed. Should this occur, wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation readings to the Receiver Module. pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the and to maintain the proper pressure. system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure MoniThe TPMS consists of the following components: toring Telltale Light” and ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will turn • Receiver Module off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors to receive this information. • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 5 358 STARTING AND OPERATING Check TPMS Warning 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on NOTE: and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a 1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire. repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when the 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warndue to any of the following: ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to Light” will turn ON and a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the be displayed for a minimum of five seconds. An TPM sensors. ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed. 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above that affects radio wave signals. 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring 3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and housings. then remain on solid. 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 359 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. Premium System – If Equipped NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. The TPMS consists of the following components: • Receiver Module • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors • Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheel-wells) • Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime readings to the Receiver Module. will sound when tire pressure is low in one or 5 360 STARTING AND OPERATING more of the four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed. Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected, a chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSShould this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, TEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then and inflate all tires with low pressure (those flashing in display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold indicate which sensor is not being received. placard pressure value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, message. Once the system receives the updated tire providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault pressures, the system will automatically update, the no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing, and the Light” will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive can occur due to any of the following: this information. 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors. STARTING AND OPERATING 361 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting NOTE: that affects radio wave signals. 1. The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS 3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire. housings. 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain ON, a chime will sound, and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value and the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message in the graphic display. The EVIC will also display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected. In this case, the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is then followed with a graphic display with pres3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above sure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring values are still being received from the TPM sensors but Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and they may not be located in the correct vehicle position. then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will The system still needs to be serviced as long as the display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed. minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. 5 362 STARTING AND OPERATING 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired opreinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, eration. the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new following licenses: pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire KR5S18002015B pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in United States any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need Canada 267T-S180015B to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. STARTING AND OPERATING 363 FUEL REQUIREMENTS Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available. This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not Reformulated Gasoline provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner engines. burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are speyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imhigh speeds can cause damage and immediate service is prove air quality. required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoas hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi- lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will proence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline vide excellent performance and durability of engine and before considering service for the vehicle. fuel system components. 5 364 STARTING AND OPERATING Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- Non-Flex Fuel Vehicle (FFV) is compatible with gasoline genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethamay be used in your vehicle. nol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. CAUTION! DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol. If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: • Operate in a lean mode. • OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on. • Poor engine performance. • Poor cold start and cold drivability. • Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion. To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with Problems that result from using gasoline containing E-85 perform the following: Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol • Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer.) are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may • Change the engine oil and oil filter. not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty. STARTING AND OPERATING 365 • Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the Materials Added To Fuel engine controller memory. All gasoline sold in the United States is required to More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal exposure to E-85 fuel. conditions and they would result in additional cost. MMT In Gasoline Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl) fuel. is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is Fuel System Cautions blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage CAUTION! beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s life and reduces emissions system performance in some performance: vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline • The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perforof gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, mance and damage the emissions control system. therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal (Continued) and California reformulated gasoline. 5 366 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! (Continued) • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance. • The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer. NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 367 WARNING! (Continued) • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED 5 E-85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline-only powered vehicles. E-85 Fuel Cap CAUTION! Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can operate on E-85. 368 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame. Fuel Requirements E-85 Badge Ethanol Fuel (E-85) If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels. For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternatE-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom15% unleaded gasoline. mended. STARTING AND OPERATING 369 When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that: • You do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when refueling. engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used. • You drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles least 5 miles (8 km). (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formustarting and/or significant deterioration in driveability lated engine oils. These special requirements are included during warm up. in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only NOTE: recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet • Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395 non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience contains additional requirements, developed during exhard starting and rough idle following start up even if tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to the above recommendations are followed, especially Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C). equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395. • Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your 5 370 STARTING AND OPERATING Starting Replacement Parts The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up. Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts. NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C). Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle. Cruising Range Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon (mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation. CAUTION! Maintenance CAUTION! Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect drivability. STARTING AND OPERATING 371 ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left rear quarter panel of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle. 5 Fuel Filler Door After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle’s surface. 372 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! • Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap). • A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on. • To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. Tether Cable NOTE: If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle. WARNING! • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 373 WARNING! (Continued) Loose Filler Cap Message If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a “gASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off the message. If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice NOTE: in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the • Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. problem will turn the MIL off. This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn VEHICLE LOADING on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is Vehicle Certification Label refueled. Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the drivers side “B” Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door. • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. • Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and doing so may cause the MIL to turn on. • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling. 5 374 STARTING AND OPERATING The label contains the following information: Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) • Name of manufacturer The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. • Month and year of manufacture • Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front WARNING! • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) • Type of Vehicle • Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH) The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN. Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Overloading The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR. STARTING AND OPERATING 375 The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR. the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate. Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle TRAILER TOWING separately. It is important that you distribute the load In this section you will find safety tips and information evenly over the front and rear axles. on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension review this information to tow your load as efficiently components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s and safely as possible. GVWR. To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, Loading follow the requirements and recommendations in this To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing. weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within 5 376 STARTING AND OPERATING measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be The following trailer towing related definitions will assist supported by the scale. you in understanding the following information: Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Common Towing Definitions The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle CertificaThe GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem- information. porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to STARTING AND OPERATING 377 WARNING! It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer. Weight-Carrying Hitch A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or Tongue Weight (TW) some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the of hitches are the most popular on the market today and hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as trailers. part of the load on your vehicle. 5 378 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg) II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) IV - Extra Heavy 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg) Class Class Class Class Duty Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain. All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 379 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain. Engine/Transmission 2.4L/Auto 3.6L/Auto Max. Frontal Area Max. Gross Trailer Wt. (GTW) 1,000 lbs (450 kg) 11 sq.ft. (1.0 sq.m) (See Note 2) 22 sq.ft. (2.0 sq.m) 1,000 lbs (450 kg) Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds. Note 1: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. Max. Trailer Tongue Wt. (See Note 1) 100 lbs (45 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg) all four-cylinder engines with automatic transmission. Please see your authorized dealer for additional information. Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Note 2: Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your front shields/guards are not recommended for use with vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the 5 380 STARTING AND OPERATING rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side Consider the following items when computing the which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of • The tongue weight of the trailer. many trailer collisions. • The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on put in or on your vehicle. your bumper or trailer hitch. • The weight of the driver and all passengers. NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 381 Towing Requirements To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended: CAUTION! • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. • Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. WARNING! Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible: • Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision. • When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires. (Continued) 5 382 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners. • Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels. • GCWR must not be exceeded. • Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded: (Continued) 1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard. 2. GTW 3. GAWR 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized. Towing Requirements – Tires • Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire. • Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to STARTING AND OPERATING 383 “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper- Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes ating” for proper tire inflation procedures. • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. • Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation presThis could cause inadequate braking and possible sures before trailer usage. personal injury. • Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with proper inspection procedure. a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic • When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Inforbrake controller is not required. mation” in “Starting and Operating” for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s 2,000 lbs (907 kg). GVWR and GAWR limits. 5 384 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued) If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. • Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision. Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring WARNING! • Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a collision. (Continued) Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety. The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector. NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring harness. STARTING AND OPERATING 385 The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle, but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations. 5 1 — Female Pins 2 — Male Pin 3 — Ground 4 — Park 5 — Left Stop/Turn 6 — Right Stop/Turn 1 2 3 4 — — — — Battery Backup Lamps Right Stop/Turn Electric Brakes 5 — Ground 6 — Left Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps 386 STARTING AND OPERATING If you REGULARLY TOW a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the autoBefore setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, matic transmission fluid and filter as specified for “poand backing up the trailer in an area located away from lice, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the heavy traffic. “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance Automatic Transmission intervals. Towing Tips The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, select the ⬙3⬙ range (with four-speed transmission) or select a lower gear using the AutoStick® shift control (with six-speed transmission). NOTE: Check the transmission fluid level (four-speed transmission only) before towing. The six-speed transmission does not require a fluid level check before towing. If, however, you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, see your authorized dealer immediNOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle ately for assistance. under heavy loading conditions, will improve perfor- AutoStick® mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces– When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the sive shifting and heat build-up. This action will also highest gear that allows for adequate performance and provide better engine braking. avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if needed to maintain the desired speed. STARTING AND OPERATING 387 – To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow. Cooling System Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed. • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions: City Driving Highway Driving • When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until Reduce speed. you can get back to cruising speed. Air Conditioning • Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to Turn off temporarily. maximize fuel efficiency. 5 388 STARTING AND OPERATING RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Flat Tow Dolly Tow On Trailer Wheels OFF the Ground NONE Front Rear ALL All Models NOT ALLOWED OK NOT ALLOWED OK STARTING AND OPERATING 389 Recreational Towing – All Models Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure: 1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly. 3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in PARK. 4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. 5. Release the parking brake. CAUTION! • DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result. • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 5 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS 䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .392 ▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .392 䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 ▫ Engine Oil Overheating (2.4L Engine Only) — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .394 ▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 ▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 ▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 ▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 ▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 ▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .413 ▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 6 392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the instrument panel, below the radio. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action. Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — Slow down. tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery. CAUTION! Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle, when safe. Turn the air conditioner off and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range. After appropriate action has been taken, if the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for service. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393 NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down Engine Oil Overheating (2.4L Engine Only) — If an impending overheat condition: Equipped • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C During sustained high-speed driving or trailer tow up system adds heat to the engine cooling system and long grades on a hot day, the engine oil temperature may become too hot. If this happens, the “HOTOIL” message turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum flashes in the odometer and the vehicle speed will be heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control reduced to 53 mph (85 km/h) until the engine oil to high. This allows the heater core to act as a temperature is reduced. supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat NOTE: The vehicle speed is reduced to a maximum of from the engine cooling system. 53 mph (85 km/h). You may of course, reduce your vehicle speed further if needed. WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. 6 394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. (Continued) • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. Jack Location The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor in the trunk. Spare Tire Stowage The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor in the trunk. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395 Spare Tire Removal Preparations For Jacking Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down. 1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas. WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. 3. Set the parking brake. Spare Tire And Jack Storage 4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission). 6 396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5. Turn OFF the ignition. 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel. NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked. Jacking Instructions WARNING! Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. • Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in REVERSE. • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack. (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397 WARNING! (Continued) • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic. • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground. Jack Warning Label CAUTION! Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. NOTE: Refer to the Compact Spare Tire section of Tires-General Information--for information about the spare tire, its use, and operation. 6 398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack assembly. NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack with two attachment points. When the jack is partially expanded, the tension between the two attachment points holds the jack handle in place. Removing Jack Handle From Jack 2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399 CAUTION! Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in Step 3. 3. There is a front and rear jacking location on each side of the vehicle. The plastic trim has been cut away to expose the jacking locations on the body. 6 Front Jacking Location Jacking Locations 400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Rear Jacking Location 4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged to the jacking location on the wheel to be changed. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged. Jack Engaged (Front Jacking Location) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401 5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right, using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability. 6. Remove the wheel nuts, and pull the wheel and wheel covers (where applicable) off the hub. Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. CAUTION! Jack Engaged (Rear Jacking Location) WARNING! Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly. 6 402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! • To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. • To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges. 7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left. Mounting Spare Tire 8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut torque is 100 ft lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403 9. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel Road Tire Installation blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assemVehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using the means provided. Release the park- 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. ing brake before driving the vehicle. 2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting WARNING! studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in WARNING! the places provided. 10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area and have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible. 11. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct the tire pressure as required. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. 6 404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover. 4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. WARNING! Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap 1 — Valve Stem 2 — Valve Notch 3 — Wheel Lug Nut 4 — Wheel Cover 5 — Mounting Stud To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. 5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405 6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the WARNING! wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tight- do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle ness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may about the correct tightness, have them checked with a result in personal injury. torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack station. handle counterclockwise. 7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly 4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased seated against the wheel. leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until Vehicles Without Wheel Covers each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. about the correct tightness, have them checked with a 2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the station. lug nuts. 6 406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel. JUMP-STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. CAUTION! Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur. WARNING! Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and Preparations For Jump-Start precautions. The battery in your vehicle is located between the left front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash shield. To allow jump-starting there are remote battery posts located on the left side of the engine compartment. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407 WARNING! Remote Battery Posts 1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap) 2 — Remote Negative (-) Post • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades. • Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. 1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. 6 408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive 4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park (+) battery post. To remove the cover, press the locking the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the tab and pull upward on the cover. parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. WARNING! Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. Jump-Starting Procedure WARNING! Locking Tab Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409 CAUTION! WARNING! Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. battery. 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in negative (-) post of the booster battery. the reverse sequence: 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the disthe discharged battery. charged battery. 7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 6 410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. CAUTION! (Continued) the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. 10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi- FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE tive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle, can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the you should have the battery and charging system in- steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE spected at your authorized dealer. and REVERSE, while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will CAUTION! maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets wheels, or racing the engine. draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411 CAUTION! CAUTION! Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could (Continued) 6 412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! (Continued) explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 4. Turn the ignition to the ACC or ON/RUN position, but do not start the engine. 5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. 6. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole (at the front of the cupholder) and push and hold the override release lever forward. 7. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position. If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be 8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL. moved out of the PARK position, you can use the 9. Reinstall the cupholder liner. following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever: 1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. 3. Remove the rubber cupholder liner. Squeeze one side of the liner’s center to expose its edge and facilitate removal. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 413 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. Towing Condition Flat Tow Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Wheels OFF the Ground NONE Rear Flatbed Front ALL Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed. All Models If transmission is operable: • Transmission in NEUTRAL • 25 mph (40 km/h) max speed • 15 mi (24 km) max distance OK BEST METHOD If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position. If your vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to ⬙Shift Lever Override⬙ in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for towing. 6 414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! • Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Damage to the fascia will occur. • When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing. • Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result. The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions: • The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. • The towing distance must not exceed 15 mi (24 km). • The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15 mi (24 km), it must be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised). CAUTION! Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15 mi (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can cause severe transmission damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 415 Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. Flatbed towing is the preferred towing method. However, if a flatbed towing vehicle is not available, wheel lift towing equipment may be used. Rear towing (with the front wheels on the ground) is not allowed, as transmission damage will occur. If rear towing is the only alternative, the front wheels must be placed on a towing dolly. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 6 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . .419 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .420 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .421 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .421 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 ▫ A/C Air Filter – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .424 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 ▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 ▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 7 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 ▫ Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 ▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 ▫ Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 ▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 ▫ Cleaning Center Console Cupholders. . . . . . . .456 䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 ▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 ▫ Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 ▫ License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . .472 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L 7 1 2 3 4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir — Automatic Transmission Dipstick — Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 6 7 8 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) — Air Cleaner Filter — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap 10 — Engine Oil Dipstick 11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L 1 2 3 4 — — — — Engine Coolant Reservoir Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Brake Fluid Reservoir Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 5 6 7 8 — Air Cleaner Filter — Engine Oil Dipstick — Engine Oil Fill — Washer Fluid Reservoir MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly installed. A “gASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer “Reset” button to turn off the message. If the problem 7 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass do the following: an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. not crank or start the engine. For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not start this test over. on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON system is ready for testing. position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS of a normal bulb check. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is happen: ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced • The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine the ignition or start the engine. This means that your running. vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station. REPLACEMENT PARTS • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainteIf your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was Limited Warranty. recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personsystem to update. A recheck with the above test routine nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are may then indicate that the system is now ready. 7 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before The pages that follow contain the required maintenance attempting any procedure yourself. services determined by the engineers who designed your NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle. systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed penalties being assessed against you. “Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. which may require servicing or replacement in the future. CAUTION! • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center. (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 CAUTION! (Continued) • Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure. Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick. Either the range markings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of the range marking. 7 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil. Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever occurs first. This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L Engine MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating temMOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil® peratures. This engine oil improves low temperature or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating tem- starting and vehicle fuel economy. peratures. This engine oil improves low temperature The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended starting and vehicle fuel economy. engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Comengine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on partment” illustration in this section. Engine Oil Viscosity – 2.4L Engine the engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Com- NOTE: SAE 5W-30 engine oil may be used when SAE partment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further 5W-20 engine oil meeting MS- 6395 is not available. information. 7 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomyour area. mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes Engine Oil Filter are followed. The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter Materials Added To Engine Oil at every engine oil change. Synthetic Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and filter and are recommended. oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Engine Air Cleaner Filter indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service maintenance intervals. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 WARNING! The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended. Maintenance-Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment behind the left front fender and is accessible without removing the tire and wheel. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the right and remove the inner fender shield. 7 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. • It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. WARNING! • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information. • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. 7 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling WARNING! R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- operating or personal injury may result. ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning The A/C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind service be performed by authorized dealer or other the glove box. Perform the following procedure to reservice facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. place the filter: NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system 1. Open the glove box and remove all contents. sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor 2. Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the oil, and refrigerants. door. A/C Air Filter – If Equipped Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 3. Disconnect the glove box door dampener from the slot on the side of the box. This is done by grasping the dampener connector (on the outside of the box) and the end of the connector pin (on the inside of the box) with your thumb and forefinger and pulling outward while lightly lifting upward on the door with your other hand. Once disconnected, the dampener will retract underneath the instrument panel if you release it. 4. Pivot the glove box downward. 5. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover. A/C Air Filter Replacement 6. Remove the A/C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of the housing. 7 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 7. Install the A/C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover. CAUTION! The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to install the filter properly will result in the need to replace it more often. MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small 8. Reinstall the glove box door dampener and glove box. amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri- windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water. When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with blades clean. This will help blade performance. petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend- in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This performance of blades may be present with chattering, rating information can be found on most washer fluid marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions containers. are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necesWARNING! sary. Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer and the rear window washer share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. 7 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. WARNING! • Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 CAUTION! • The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine. • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle. Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately. 7 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Cooling System age: • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. WARNING! • When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at anytime the ignition switch is in the ON position. • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439 Coolant Checks Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS12106). Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. Selection Of Coolant Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub- “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. 7 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. (Continued) Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441 you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle. (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system. Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainthat meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- tain the proper level of protection against freezing acdard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated. • We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, Material Standard MS-12106. have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as possible. that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concen- Cooling System Pressure Cap trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine −34° F (−37° C) are anticipated. coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion- (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant recovery tank. 7 442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check WARNING! with your local authorities to determine the disposal • The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by anicooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground pressure to build up in the cooling system. To spills immediately. prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. Coolant Level Four-Cylinder Engines – the coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is adequate. With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines, shown on the bottle. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443 Six-Cylinder Engines – the level of the engine coolant Points To Remember (antifreeze) in the pressurized coolant bottle should be NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ between the “COLD” and “FULL” range on the bottle kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming when the engine is cold. from the front of the engine compartment. This is norThe radiator normally remains completely full, so there is mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporengine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing cool- ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine ant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant If an examination of your engine compartment shows no bottle need only be checked once a month. When addi- evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be tional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. Do not overfill. • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing. 7 444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are Brake System required, the cooling system should be pressure tested In order to assure brake system performance, all brake for leaks. system components should be inspected periodically. • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS- maintenance intervals. 12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum compoWARNING! nents. Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or hoses are not kinked or obstructed. riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency. condenser clean. • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, the brake system warning light indicates system failure. poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445 Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services. Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. WARNING! • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. (Continued) 7 446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision. (Continued) Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447 NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered transmission; only the approved lubricant should be product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addiused. tives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid CAUTION! leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac- adversely affect seals. turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter CAUTION! shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and the chemicals can damage your transmission compoGenuine Parts” in this section for fluid specificanents. Such damage is not covered by the New tions. Vehicle Limited Warranty. Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission. 7 448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 180° F (82° C), Use the following procedure to check the transmission which is the normal operating temperature after the fluid level properly: vehicle is driven at least 15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid 1. Park the vehicle on level ground. cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a temperature of approximately 80° F 2. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60 (27° C). seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of this procedure. 7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert it until seated. Then, remove the dipstick and note the fluid level on 3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there pedal. is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick. 4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posiNote that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid tion (allowing time for the transmission to fully enif the actual level is at or above the hole. gage in each position), ending with the transmission in • If the fluid is hot, the fluid level should be in the PARK. crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper two holes in the dipstick). 5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to prevent dirt • If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between from entering the transmission. the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.” Fluid Level Check – Four-Speed Transmission MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449 If the fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait at least two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level. 8. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake. To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. CAUTION! • Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. • Dirt and water in the transmission can cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make sure that the dipstick cap is re-seated properly. Fluid Level Check – Six-Speed Transmission The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. 7 450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is provided. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using a special service dipstick. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage. CAUTION! • If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the ⬙Maintenance Schedule⬙ for the proper maintenance intervals. In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason. Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451 The following maintenance recommendations will enable Washing you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veresistance built into your vehicle. hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with What Causes Corrosion? clear water. Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumupaint and protective coatings from your vehicle. lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug The most common causes are: and Tar Remover to remove. • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® • Stone and gravel impact. Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. • Insects, tree sap and tar. • Salt in the air near seacoast localities. • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. 7 452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive packaged and sealed. near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month. • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel. • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as open. possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. Special Care MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care Cleaning Headlights • All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly lights (if equipped) that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner. CAUTION! Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. 7 454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner: Interior Care Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface, • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not with a clean, dry towel. use protectants or other products, which may cause undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. restore the low glare surface. • For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a Cleaning Interior Trim mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR® Total Clean or equiva• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose lent, then MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to • Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of clean vinyl upholstery protectants on Stain Repel products. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455 Cleaning Leather Upholstery MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery. Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition. WARNING! Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror. 7 456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly. The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care Cleaning Center Console Cupholders must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. Removal 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be Grab the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift upused, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive ward. cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp Cleaning rag. Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Seat Belt Maintenance Let soak for approximately one hour. After one hour pull Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical the liner from the water and dip it back into the water solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. about six times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a surfaces with a clean soft cloth. mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. 2. Dry with a soft cloth. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457 Installation WARNING! Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly. FUSES If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. WARNING! WARNING! • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized Dealer. Integrated Power Module The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A label that identifies each component may be printed on the inside of the cover. Refer to the graphic below for FUSES/TIPM location. 7 458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Cartridge Fuse — 3 — 4 — 5 — 6 — Cavity Integrated Power Module Cavity 1 Cartridge Fuse 40 Amp Green Mini Fuse — Description Power Top Module – If Equipped Mini Fuse 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red Description Brake Vacuum Pump Center High Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)/ Brake Switch Ignition Switch Trailer Tow – If Equipped Power Mirror Switch/Climate Controls MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459 7 Cartridge Fuse — 8 — 9 40 Amp Green 10 — Cavity 11 — Mini Fuse 30 Amp Green 30 Amp Green 20 Amp Yellow 15 Amp Lt Blue Description Cavity Ignition Off Draw (IOD) Sense 1 Ignition Off Draw (IOD) Sense 2 Battery Feed – Power Seats – If Equipped Instrument Panel/ Power Locks/ Interior Lights Selectable Power Outlet (Inside Center Arm Rest) 12 Cartridge Fuse — 13 — 14 — 15 40 Amp Green — 16 Mini Fuse Description 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red — — Radiator Fan Relay 15 Amp Lt. Blue Sunroof – If Equipped Ignition/Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel 7 460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 17 18 Cartridge Fuse — 19 40 Amp Green — 20 — 21 — Mini Fuse 10 Amp Red — 20 Amp Yellow 15 Amp Lt. Blue 10 Amp Red Description Cavity Wireless Control Module (WCM)/ Clock/Steering Control Module (SCM) Auto Shutdown (ASD) Relay Audio Amplifier – If Equipped Radio 22 Cartridge Fuse — 23 — 24 — 25 — Siren – If Equipped 26 — Mini Fuse 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Lt. Blue 25 Amp Natural 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Lt. Blue Description Ignition Run – Climate Controls/Hot Cupholder – If Equipped Auto Shutdown (ASD) Relay 3 Sunroof – If Equipped Ignition Run — Heated Mirrors - If Equipped Auto Shutdown (ASD) Relay 2 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461 Cavity 27 28 29 Cartridge Fuse — — — Mini Fuse 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red — Description Cavity Ignition Run – Occupant Classification Module (OCM)/Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Ignition Run — Occupant Classification Module (OCM)/Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Hot Car (No Fuse Required) 30 31 32 33 Cartridge Fuse — — 30 Amp Pink — Mini Fuse 20 Amp Yellow — — 10 Amp Red Description Ignition Run – Heated Seats – If Equipped Spare Auto Shutdown (ASD) Relay 1 Switch Bank/ Diagnostic Link Connector/ Powertrain Control Module (PCM) 7 462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 34 35 Cartridge Fuse 30 Amp Pink 40 Amp Green Mini Fuse — — Description Cavity Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) Module – If Equipped/ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Module – If Equipped Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) Module – If Equipped/ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Module – If Equipped 36 37 Cartridge Fuse 30 Amp Pink — Mini Fuse — 25 Amp Natural Description Passenger Door Module (PDM)/ Driver Door Module (DDM) Power Top Module – If Equipped MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463 CAUTION! • When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in an electrical system failure. • When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. VEHICLE STORAGE If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your battery. • Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw). • Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery. • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. 7 464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE REPLACEMENT BULBS Exterior Bulbs Interior Bulbs Front Courtesy/Reading Lamp Center Courtesy/Reading Lamp Visor Vanity Lamp Glove Box Lamp Shift Indicator Lamp Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp Bulb Number 578/W5W 578/W5W A6220 A6220 IKLE14140 579 NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement. Bi-Halogen Headlamp Front Turn Signal Lamp Front Park Lamp Front Fog Lamp Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamp Backup Lamp License Lamp Bulb Number HIR2 3157NAK LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) H11 LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) 921 W5W MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465 2. To begin removal of the driver side headlamp, reach in through the inner fender headlamp access door and NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmograsp the bulb cover. spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process. BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamp 1. Raise and prop open the hood. Locate the connector behind the headlamp. NOTE: To service the driver’s or passenger side headlamp, it is necessary turn the steering wheel to access the inner fender headlamp access door. 7 1 — Headlamp 2 — Turn Signal 466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE To begin removal of the passenger side headlamp, reach 3. Rotate bulb cover and one-quarter turn and pull in through the inner fender headlamp access door and outward from assembly. grasp the bulb cover. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 4. Rotate bulb and connector one-quarter turn and pull 5. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb. outward from assembly. 6. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, wipe the bulb with a clean cloth and rubbing alcohol. CAUTION! Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. 7. Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and rotate clockwise one-quarter turn to secure. 7 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 8. Place bulb cover back and rotate one-quarter turn Front Fog Lamp clockwise to secure. NOTE: Access to the lamps through the lower fascia Front Turn Signal cutout is limited. We recommend you access the lamps by turning the steering wheel to allow access and remove 1. Raise and prop open the hood. the inner fender shield. 2. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn 1. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the headlamp counterclockwise and remove it from the fog lamp housing. housing. 3. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install 2. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb. the replacement bulb. 4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlamp housing and rotate the connector oneCAUTION! quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place. Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469 3. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog lamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place. Backup Lamps 1. Open the trunk and gently pull back the trunk liner behind the tail lamp (requires removal of a push pin holding the trunk trim in place near the tail lamp). 2. Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the tail lamp housing. NOTE: Placing a small flat head screwdriver or similar tool between the lamp outboard ball stud and plastic grommet from inside the trunk can help to disengage the outboard edge of the tail lamp. 3. Grasp the tail lamp by both the outboard and inboard sides, and pull firmly to disengage the tail lamp from the vehicle. 7 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: It is normal to hear a loud sound when the lower 6. Reinstall the tail lamp, fasteners, and trunk liner. tail lamp area unsnaps from the vehicle mounting License Plate Lamp bracket during tail lamp removal. 1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking tab on the side of the lamp assembly and pull down on the lamp assembly for removal. 2. Pull bulb from socket, replace, and reinstall the lamp assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure. 4. Twist and remove socket from lamp. 5. Remove bulb from socket and replace. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 FLUID CAPACITIES U.S. Fuel (Approximate) All Engines — (Except 2.4L PZEV) 16.9 Gallons 2.4L PZEV (Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle) 18.5 Gallons Engine Oil With Filter 2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 4.5 Quarts 3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts Cooling System* 2.4L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine 7.7 Quarts Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) 11.6 Quarts 3.6L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) * Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Metric 64 Liters 70 Liters 4.26 Liters 5.6 Liters 7.3 Liters 7 11 Liters 472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine except PZEV* Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology). We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter. We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]). MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473 Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Spark Plugs – 2.4L with PZEV* We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.031 in [0.8 mm]). Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]). Fuel Selection 87 Octane * PZEV = Partial Zero Emission Vehicle Chassis Component Automatic Transmission Brake Master Cylinder Power Steering Reservoir Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Use only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend MOPAR® ATF+4® fluid. We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 and SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid. 7 M A I N T E N A ▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 N C E MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS 䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 S C H E D U L E S 8 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 476 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in indicator system. The oil change indicator system will “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inremind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for formation. scheduled maintenance. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interBased on engine operation conditions, the oil change vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, indicator message will illuminate. This means that serwhichever comes first. vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will • Check engine oil level influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the • Check windshield washer fluid level change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as • Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator master cylinder, power steering and transmission message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a (four-speed only) and fill as needed scheduled oil change is performed by someone other MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 477 M • Check function of all interior and exterior lights Required Maintenance Intervals. Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals. At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: • Change oil and filter. • Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on. • Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required. • Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick. • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake. At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: • Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses. • Inspect exhaust system. • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions. A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 8 Additional Inspections Inspect the CV joints. Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals and replace if necessary. Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. Adjust parking brake as necessary 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 S C H E D U L E S 2 32,000 M 478 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I Maintenance Chart N T Mileage or time passed E (whichever comes first) N A N Or Years: C E Or Kilometers: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Additional Maintenance Replace engine air filter. Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. Replace spark plugs (2.4L Engine). ** Replace spark plugs (2.4L PZEV Engine Only). ** Replace spark plugs (3.6L Engine). ** 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 479 M X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 X S C H E D U L E S 8 Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing. Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 M 480 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I Mileage or time passed N (whichever comes first) T E N Or Years: A Or Kilometers: N C E X X X X X X MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 481 M ** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply. WARNING! • You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS 䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 ▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .485 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 ▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 ▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .489 ▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .486 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .489 ▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .486 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 ▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .490 9 484 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 ▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 ▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 485 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealer, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE current problem. The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services. specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the 9 486 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) correctly and in a timely manner. • Vehicle delivery date and mileage This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center solved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004 • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. Phone: (800) 247–9753 They want to know if you need assistance. • If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621 center. Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French ter should include the following information: • Owner’s name and address • Owner’s telephone number (home and office) IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 487 Mexico, D. F. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator. In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Service Contract Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French). In Mexico Contact: Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Sante Fe C.P. 05109 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY. 9 488 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents. We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns. WARNING! Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 489 campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are dealer, and the manufacturer. available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– operating at its best. 9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could http://www.safercar.gov. cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you manufacturer. should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/ MOPAR® PARTS 9 490 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form. Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests manuals (no P.O. Boxes). and a complete list of all tools and equipment. Service Manuals Owner’s Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the mation that students and professional technicians need in assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 491 Call toll free at: Treadwear • 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. • 1–800–387–1143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: • www.techauthority.com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Traction Grades The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. 9 492 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE WARNING! The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. INDEX 10 494 INDEX About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .440 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .428 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Antenna, Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .19 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .275 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 INDEX 495 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . .21 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .26 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 Caps, Filler Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 10 496 INDEX Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .422 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Cleaning Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Connector UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .261 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .441 Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 INDEX 497 Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .174 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Crankcase Ventilation Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 10 498 INDEX Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .222 Emergency, In Case of Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .422 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 INDEX 499 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Fabric Care. . . . . . . . . Filler Location Fuel . . . Filters Air Cleaner . . . . . . Air Conditioning . . Engine Oil . . . . . . . Engine Oil Disposal Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . Hazard Warning . . . Turn Signal . . . . . . Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range . . . . Engine Oil . . . . . . . Fuel Requirements . Maintenance . . . . . . Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 .282 .428 .428 .392 .392 .100 .166 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 .369 .367 .370 .370 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 .291 .471 .100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 .444 .439 .425 .318 .472 .166 .468 .159 .410 .363 .371 .365 .363 10 500 INDEX Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . Filler Door (Gas Cap) Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . Light . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials Added . . . . Methanol . . . . . . . . . Octane Rating . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . Tank Capacity . . . . . . Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel System Caution . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 .206 .206 .363 .206 .207 .365 .364 .363 .363 .471 .367 .371 .372 .457 Gauges Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . Hazard Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 . . .315 . . .392 . . .465 INDEX 501 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 . . . . . . . . .378 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .170 . . . . . . . . .161 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . .160 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hitches Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 .453 .165 .165 .164 .166 .465 .163 .154 .108 .150 .270 .293 10 502 INDEX Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Keyless Entry System (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .328 Knee Bolster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 INDEX 503 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .218 Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .206 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 .424 .476 .218 .490 .168 .444 10 504 INDEX Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Indicator . . . . . Oil Change Indicator, Reset Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . Change Interval . . . . . . Checking . . . . . . . . . . . Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filter Disposal . . . . . . . Identification Logo . . . . Materials Added to . . . . Recommendation . . . . . Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 .210 .212 .212 .425 .471 .212 .425 .425 .428 .428 .428 .426 .428 .426 .428 .427 .428 .208 INDEX 505 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .337 Power Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .189 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 Pretensioners Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 .441 .270 .268 .194 .159 .105 .199 10 506 INDEX Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Remote Control Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .268 Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .51 And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 INDEX 507 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Seat Belts (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490 Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 10 508 INDEX Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Steering Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .268 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .60 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .275 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .336 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 INDEX 509 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 .394 .350 .336 .354 .216 .491 .344 .351 .353 .330 .331 .345 .394 .349 .382 .349 .330 .379 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Transaxle Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 10 510 INDEX Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry). . . .26 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Trip Odometer Reset Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uconnect® (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . Understanding Your Instrument Panel. Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .261 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 .261 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 .109 .204 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .206 .491 Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 INDEX 511 Washer Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Water Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 Wipers, Intermittent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 10 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation. The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped. The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions. All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems. 2014 200 2014 OWNER’S MANUAL Chrysler Group LLC 14C41-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A. 200